Agenda packet — Gardena City Council, November 18, 2025 (part 5 of 5)

UltraSystems No. 250926

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 COSTS ........................................................................................................................................................... 2

TABLES

Table 1.0-1 - Proposed Fees- IS/MND ........................................................................................................................... 2 Table 1.0-2 – UltraSystems Labor Rate Schedule ..................................................................................................... 3 Table 1.0-3 – Detailed Cost Breakdown- IS/MND .................................................................................................... 4

CITY OF GARDENA - ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING SERVICES

Page 2 ends

UltraSystems No. 250926

1.0 COSTS
Table 1.0-1 provides a cost summary of our proposed fees. UltraSystems rate sheet is reflected in Table 1.0-2, and a detailed cost breakdown has been provided in Table 1.0-3. Invoices would be billed monthly to the City, based on a Fixed Fee, % Complete contract.

Table 1.0-1
PROPOSED FEES – IS/MND
TASK # TASKS FEE ($)

1.0 Project Initiation, Project Management, Coordination, Project Description

1.1 Kick-off Meeting $400

1.2 Project Management and Coordination $4,240

1.3 Project Description $9,140
Subtotal $13,780

2.0 Prepare Technical Studies/Reports/Assessments/Data Runs

2.1 Background Data Collection $3,120

2.2 Air Quality/GHG Tech Memo $8,930

2.3 Cultural Resources Assessment $8,860

2.4 AB 52 and Tribal Cultural Resources Technical Services $5,840

2.5 Energy Assessment $4,930

2.6 Phase I ESA $5,810

2.7 Noise Assessment $10,590

2.8 CEQA VMT Screening Analysis $5,970
Subtotal $54,050

3.0 Administrative Draft Initial Study, Mitigated Negative Declaration and Mitigation Monitoring Program

3.1 Administrative Draft Initial Study $18,240

3.2 Administrative Draft MND and Draft MMRP $4,020
Subtotal $22,260

4.0 Public Draft Initial Study, Mitigated Negative Declaration and Mitigation Monitoring Program

4.1 Public Draft IS/MND and MMRP $3,650
Subtotal $3,650

5.0 Public and Agency Review

5.1 Public and Agency Review of Draft IS/MND $2,200
Subtotal $2,200

6.0 Final IS/MND/MMRP/Public Hearings/NOD

6.1 Response to Comments $10,520

6.2 Final IS/MND/MMRP $6,610

6.3 Public Hearing Attendance (2) $1,480

6.4 Notice of Determination $4,730
Subtotal $23,340
TOTAL COST $119,280
Notes:

1. Fees were calculated using UltraSystems’ 2025 Standard Rate Schedule that is provided in Table 9.0-2 below.

2. Mileage associated with direct costs was calculated using the estimated 2024 IRS rate of $0.70 cents per mile. CITY OF GARDENA - ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING SERVICES

Page 3 ends

UltraSystems No. 250926

3. Fees include labor and direct costs (including mileage, and printing and mailing of reports and notices).

Table 1.0-2

ULTRASYSTEMS LABOR RATE SCHEDULE

PROFESSIONAL STAFF HOURLY Director $200
Senior Project Manager $195
Deputy Project Manager $190
Senior Principal Engineer $190
Scientist/Engineer $180
Senior Planner $170
Associate Planner $165
Planner/Environmental Analyst $160
Senior Biologist II $170
Staff Biologist II $165
Staff Biologist I $160
Cultural Specialist $165
Archaeologist $160
Senior GIS Analyst $165
Word Processor $130
FIELD EQUIPMENT Daily Weekly
Excavation Screen $5 $20
Field Supplies (shovels, health and safety, flagging, binoculars, etc.) $15 $60 Garmin GPS (non-Trimble) $5 $20
iPad Data Tablet $25 $100
Kestrel Anemometer (or equivalent) $5 $20
Photoionization detector (PID) or equivalent $100 $400
Quest SoundPro SP-DL-1–1/3 Sound Level Meter (or equivalent) $110 $440 RKI GX-2003 Multi-Gas Meter (or equivalent) $65 $260
Trimble Geo7x GPS Unit with Rangefinder (or equivalent) $120 $560

Consultant support (printing, reproduction and other direct expenses) will be billed at a rate of cost plus ten (10) percent. Automobile mileage will be charged at IRS standard rates. Travel time will be billed as indicated in the hourly rate schedule abov e. Invoices will be submitted monthly for work in progress and at completion of contract obligations and are payable upon receipt.

Fees not paid within thirty (30) days of invoice date may be assessed as an interest charge of one and one-half (1.5) percent per month, from the date due (net 30). Attorney fees and court costs incurred for collection of delinquent accounts will be borne by the client. CITY OF GARDENA - ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING SERVICES

Page 4 ends

UltraSystems No. 250926
Table 1.0-3
DETAILED COST BREAKDOWN – PONCE RECYCLING IS/MND

Project
Director
Senior
Project
Manager
Deputy
Project
Manager
Senior
Principal
Engineer
Scientist/
Engineer
Senior
Planner
Associate
Planner
Planner/
Environ.

Analyst
Cultural
Specialist Archaeologist Senior GIS
Analyst
Word
Processor
$200 $195 $190 $ 190 $180 $170 $165 $160 $165 $160 $165 $130 Markup 10%

1.0 1.1 Kick-off Meeting 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 $ 395 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $400

1.2 Project Management and
Coordination 0 12 6 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 $4,240 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $4,240

1.3 Project Description 0 4 4 0 0 1 6 24 0 0 0 4 2 54 $9,140 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $9,140 Subtotal 1 17 10 4 0 16 24 0 0 0 4 2 78 $ 13,775 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $13,780

2.0 2.1 Background Data Collection 0 2 2 0 2 4 4 0 0 2 2 0 18 $3,120 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $3,120

2.2 Air Quality/GHG Tech Memo 0 2 0 16 24 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 50 $8,930 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $8,930

2.3 Cultural Resources Assessment 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 16 4 4 50 $8,090 75 $53 $0 $0 $715 $8,860

2.4 AB 52 and Tribal Cultural
Resources Technical Services 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32 2 0 36 $5,840 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $5,840

2.5 Energy Assessment 0 2 4 2 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 28 $4,930 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $4,930

2.6 Phase I ESA 0 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 8 $1,410 0 $0 $4,000 $400 $0 $5,810

2.7 Noise Assessment 0 2 4 12 32 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 58 $10,370 75 $53 $0 $0 $165 $10,590

2.8 CEQA VMT Screening Analysis 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 4 10 $1,570 0 $0 $4,000 $400 $0 $5,970 Subtotal 0 16 14 30 74 4 4 0 24 50 20 22 258 $ 44,260 150 $105 $8,000 $800 $880 $54,050

3.0 3.1 Administrative Draft Initial Study 1 12 4 0 0 2 4 32 16 0 0 12 8 109 $18,240 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $18,240

3.2 Administrative Draft MND and
Draft MMRP 1 6 6 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 4 2 3 $4,020 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $4,020 Subtotal 2 18 10 0 0 24 38 16 0 0 12 12 132 $ 22,260 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $22,260

4.0 4.1 Public Draft IS/MND and MMRP 0 4 0 0 2 6 0 4 1 0 1 4 2 2 $3,650 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $3,650 Subtotal 0 4 0 0 2 6 0 4 1 0 1 4 22 $ 3,650 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $3,650

5.0 5.1 Public and Agency Review of
Draft IS/MND 1 2 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 4 1 1 $1,790 0 $0 $0 $0 $413 $2,200 Subtotal 1 2 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 4 11 $ 1,790 0 $0 $0 $0 $413 $2,200

6.0 6.1 Response to Comments 1 16 6 4 2 1 2 12 0 4 0 0 2 59 $10,520 0 $0 $0 $0 $0 $10,520

6.2 Final IS/MND/MMRP 1 6 2 1 1 0 1 2 12 0 0 0 2 37 $6,280 0 $0 $0 $0 $330 $6,610

6.3 Public Hearing Attendance 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 8 $ 1,430 75 $53 $0 $0 $0 $1,480

6.4 Notice of Determination 0 1 1 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 2 8 $ 1,315 0 $0 $0 $0 $3,410 $4,730 Subtotal 2 29 9 5 3 14 26 12 4 0 0 8 112 $ 19,545 75 $53 $0 $0 $3,740 $23,340 6 86 43 39 79 68 92 32 29 50 37 52
$
1,200 $16,770 $8,170 $7,410 $14,220 $11,560 $15,180 $5,120 $4,785 $8,000 $6,105 $6,760 613 $105,280 225 $158 $8,000 $800 $5,033 $119,280 Miles $0.70
Labor Categories >>>>
Hourly Rate>>>
Total
Hours Cost
Vehicle Travel
Hours
Subs
Direct
Expense
TOTAL
(rounded)
Direct Costs
Project Initiation, Project Management, Coordination, and Project Description Total Cost
Total Labor Hours
Final IS/MND/MMRP/Public Hearings/NOD
Prepare Technical Studies/Reports/Assessments/Data
Administrative Draft Initial Study, Mitigated Negative Declaration and Mitigation Monitoring and Reporting Program Public Draft Initial Study, Mitigated Negative Declaration and Mitigation Monitoring and Reporting Program Public and Agency Review
City of Gardena
Gardena City Council
Meeting

AGENDA REPORT

SUMMARY

Agenda Item No. 16A.

Section: DEPARTMENTAL

ITEMS - POLICE
Meeting Date: November
18, 2025

TO: THE HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE GARDENA CITY COUNCIL AGENDA TITLE: Authorization to Purchase Five (5) Ford Explorer Utility Vehicles and Two (2) Chevrolet Tahoe Vehicles from National Auto Fleet Group in the Amount of $417,015 and Build-Out Costs in the Amount of $271,695 for a Total of $688,710
COUNCIL ACTION REQUIRED:

Staff Recommendation: Authorize Purchase and Build-Out Costs RECOMMENDATION AND STAFF SUMMARY:

Staff respectfully recommends that the City Council authorize the Police Department to purchase four (4) new 2026 Ford Explorer Utility Police Interceptor AWD vehicles, one (1) new 2025 Ford Explorer Utility Police Interceptor AWD vehicle, two (2) new 2026 Chevrolet Tahoe vehicles, and including build-out costs for a total of $688,710.

The ongoing replacement of capital equipment is necessary to maintain a ﬂeet inventory that is safe, eﬃcient, and reliable. This purchase of ﬁve (5) new Ford Explorer patrol vehicles will replace the older vehicles that have reached their useful service life due to age, mileage, and general wear and tear. The additional purchase of two (2) new Chevrolet Tahoe vehicles will replace older patrol supervisor units as they offer more cargo space, durability, and better outﬁtting options for equipment. The Chevrolet Tahoe is also easily recognized as a supervisor vehicle, has a stronger frame and upgraded systems, and provides lower long-term costs and better resale value—making it a cost-effective addition to the ﬂeet. National Auto Fleet will sell and deliver the new vehicles available under the Sourcewell Master Vehicle Contract #091521-NAF. The total price for the 2026 Ford Explorer vehicles, including state sales tax and tire tax, is $58,485. The total price for the 2025 Ford Explorer, including state sales tax and tire tax, is $57,245. The total price for the 2026 Chevrolet Tahoe, including state sales tax and tire tax, is $67,916. Seven (7) vehicles will be assigned to patrol and purchased using the City's Vehicle Replacement Fund and the Supplemental Law Enforcement Services Fund. The total build-out costs for outﬁtting the vehicles with the necessary South Bay Regional Public Communications Authority (SBRPCA) equipment is approximately $37,733.46 for each Ford Explorer, and $32,488.60 for each Chevrolet Tahoe. Including the B&W paint scheme, the total costs for the build-outs is $271,695 .

FISCAL IMPACT/COST:

Fiscal Year 2025-2026: $417,015 from Vehicle Replacement Fund and $271,695 from Supplemental Law Enforcement Services Fund

APPROVED:
___________________________
Clint Osorio, City Manager
Attachments
Agenda Staff Report.pdf
National Auto Fleet Group.pdf
SBRPCA Quote.pdf

City of Gardena
Gardena City Council
Meeting

AGENDA REPORT

SUMMARY

Agenda Item No. 17A.

Section: DEPARTMENTAL

ITEMS - PUBLIC WORKS
Meeting Date: November
18, 2025

TO: THE HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE GARDENA CITY COUNCIL AGENDA TITLE: Award Construction Contract for the Gardena City Hall Electrical Systems Upgrade Project, JN 541, to Mel Smith Electric, Inc. in the amount of $743,000, Approve the Project Plans and Speciﬁcations, Budget Appropriation, Project Contingency, Construction Support Services, and Declare California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) Exemption.

COUNCIL ACTION REQUIRED:

Staff Recommendation:

Approve Construction Contract
Approve Project Plans and Speciﬁcations
Approve Budget Appropriation and Contingency
Approve Construction Support Services
Declare CEQA Exemption
RECOMMENDATION AND STAFF SUMMARY:

The Gardena City Hall Electrical Systems Upgrade Project entails a comprehensive modernization of the facility’s electrical infrastructure to accommodate increased power demands, future expansions, and the installation of electric vehicle (EV) charging stations. The project will enhance system reliability, safety, capacity and separate the system from the Police Departments building while ensuring compliance with current codes and supporting the City’s long-term sustainability goals.

The project includes coordination with Southern California Edison (SCE) for upgraded high-voltage power service, installation of new electrical infrastructure, and replacement of outdated equipment throughout the site. Major components include:

Power Distribution Upgrades:

Replacement of obsolete ZINSCO electrical panels and subpanels with new UL-listed panelboards designed to meet current National Electrical Code (NEC) standards.

Emergency Power System:

Installation of a diesel engine–driven emergency generator west of the trash enclosure to provide reliable backup power for essential City Hall systems during utility outages.

Electric Vehicle Charging Stations:

Installation of four (4) dual-port, Level 2 EV chargers in the parking area west of the trash enclosure, supporting the City’s transition toward cleaner transportation and expanded EV infrastructure. These chargers will not be for public use since they are in a secured parking area.

This project represents a signiﬁcant investment in the modernization of Gardena City Hall’s electrical system, providing:

Compliance with current NEC and safety standards
Increased capacity for present and future electrical loads Enhanced reliability and emergency preparedness
Expanded EV charging capabilities to support sustainability goals A scalable foundation for future infrastructure growth
In August of 2025, the design was completed and Public Works ﬁnalized the plans and speciﬁcations, then published a bid request in CR Planwell, Gardena Valley News, and the City website. The following seven (7) bids were received on October 21, 2025.

Organization Bid Amount

1. Mel Smith Electric, Inc., Stanton $743,000

2. GA Technical Services, Inc., Glendora $804,000

3. Amtek Construction, Orange $847,333

4. Baker Electric & Renewables LLC, Escondido $936,200

5. Waisman Construction, Inc., Canoga Park $1,135,000

6. GMJ Construction Services, Inc., Azusa $1,254,133

7. Golden Phoenix Construction Company, Inc., Azusa $1,272,000 The lowest responsive bidder, Mel Smith Electric, Inc., is a state-licensed contractor with proven experience in this ﬁeld. Their references have been veriﬁed and they will be required to meet all bonding and ﬁnancial standards. The construction duration is 75 working days, including some weekends; however, the start may be delayed due to long- lead material items. There should be no power outages during City Hall working hours. All outages are scheduled for nights and weekends. All power outages will be reviewed and approved by the City prior to implementation.

Staff recommends that the City Council approve the award of the construction contract for the Gardena City Hall Electrical Systems Upgrade Project, JN 541 to Mel Smith Electric, Inc. in the amount of $743,000 and additionally:
a. Approve the project Plans and Speciﬁcations.
b. Approve a budget appropriation of $579,000 from Deferred Maintenance funds and allocate 25% of the construction award amount ($186,000) as project contingency, considering the building's age and potential unforeseen conditions.
c. Approve Construction Support Services with Maximum Energy Professionals (MEP), in the amount $9,400. d. Declare this project to be categorically exempt under CEQA, Class 1, Section 15301, as rehabilitation of existing facilities.

FISCAL IMPACT/COST:

Source of Funds:

JN 541, FY 2025-26 CIP Adoption Budget-Deferred
Maintenance Funds $428,964
Budget Appropriation - Deferred Maintenance Fund $579,000

Total$1,007,964
Estimated Expenditures:

Consultant Design Phase and Job Cost$13,564
Job Cost for in-house Construction Management and
Inspections (CMI) services $56,000
Construction Support Services $9,400
Construction Contract Award $743,000
25% Construction Contingency $186,000

Total$1,007,964

APPROVED:
___________________________
Clint Osorio, City Manager
Attachments
JN 541_Project Plans.pdf
JN 541_Project Speciﬁcations.pdf
JN 541_Mel Smith Electric Inc. Proposal.pdf
JN 541_Construction Assistance and Support Proposal.pdf JN 541_Notice of Exemption.pdf

18.42 7/8/2025
Condition: Applicant shall submit a deferred submittal for the fence and shall comply with all provisions of the GMC Section 18.42.070

CREW AND CUSTOMERTD2386137 CUSTOMER: GLENN GUEVARACONTACT: 949-387-8989 UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTContact USADial 811 or 800-422-4133www.digalert.org/contact ·····
CREW AND CUSTOMERTD2386137 CUSTOMER: GLENN GUEVARACONTACT: 949-387-8989 UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERTContact USADial 811 or 800-422-4133www.digalert.org/contact

CITY OF GARDENA
CO

NTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
F
OR

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
UPGRADE (1700 W. 162nd STREET)
JN
541
A
ugust 2025
CI

TY OF GARDENA

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FOR

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
UPGRADE (1700 W. 162nd STREET)
JN
541
Plans & Specifications prepared by:

Memoranda:

Pl
ans and specifications are available at Planwell Administrator, 562.436.9761 or https://www.e-arc.com/location/costa-mesa/ (Go to Planrooms/Order From Planwell/Public Planroom and select City of Gardena under pulldown menu) Bid
Results: https://www.cityofgardena.org/public-contracts/ Ci
ty of Gardena Public Works Engineering Division: 310.217.9568

CITY OF GARDENA

NOTICE INVITING BIDS
for

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
(1700 W. 162nd STREET)

PROJET NO. JN 541

Plans and Specifications are available through ARC Document Solutions. Please be advised that there is an additional charge for delivery. Upon payment of the purchase price, they become the property of the purchaser and may not be returned for refund.

You may access the plans through the following website under Public Planroom:

https://www.e-arc.com/location/costa-mesa/
(Scroll down to “Planrooms”/”Order From PlanWell”/”Public Planroom” and select City of Gardena under the “in all company” pulldown menu)
or
https://customer.e-
arc.com/arcEOC/Secures/PWELL_PrivateList.aspx?PrjType=Pub&mem=29&c

For help accessing and ordering, please contact a Planwell Administrator at 562.436.9761.

Notice is hereby given that the City of Gardena will receive sealed bids at the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, 1700 W. 162 nd Street, Gardena, California, until 2 PM on Sept. 30, 2025 and shortly thereafter on this same day, they will be publicly opened and read in the City Clerk’s Office in-person and via ZOOM.

The information to join the bid opening via ZOOM is the following:

Topic: Bid Opening
Time: 2:00 PM on Sept. 30, 2025 (Shortly thereafter the deadline) Join ZOOM Meeting

Https://us02web.zoom.us/j/83221622115
Meeting ID: 832 2162 2115
Dial by phone: +1 669 900 9128 US

Should you have any questions or concern in delivering a bid or joining the ZOOM Meeting, please contact City Clerk’s office at (310) 217-9565 or via email at [email protected].

All bids must be in writing, must be sealed, and must be plainly marked on the outside: "BID ON PROJECT NO. [JN 541]. Any bid received after the hour stated above for any reason whatsoever, will not be considered for any purpose but will be returned unopened to the bidder.

Bids are required for the entire work as described below:

PROJECT SUMMARY: The proposed electrical upgrade project at Gardena City Hall encompasses a comprehensive overhaul of the building’s power distribution infrastructure to accommodate increased electrical loads, future expansions, and the addition of electric vehicle (EV) charging stations. The scope includes coordination with Southern California Edison (SCE) for high-voltage power service, installation of new electrical infrastructure, and replacement of

outdated electrical panels. This project will also involve site- specific improvements, such as the installation of an emergency power generator, security measures, and future capacity planning.

The project begins with the coordination with Southern California Edison (SCE) to obtain high- voltage electrical service from a power pole located immediately west of the City Hall’s trash enclosure, near the western property line.

The design includes a new, pad- mounted electrical switchboard to be installed on- site. The switchboard will feature a utility billing meter and a main power break disconnect. Buried conduits will be installed to connect this new switchboard to the existing main electrical panels within City Hall, ensuring proper distribution of power to the building's sub- panels. Concrete encasement will be used for the conduits to protect them from potential damage. Additionally, spare conduits will be installed between the new switchboard and the basement electric room, allowing for future expansion.

As part of the electrical upgrade, outdated ZINSCO panels and sub- panels inside the building will be replaced with new, UL -approved panelboards. These will include GFCI circuit breakers as required by the National Electrical Code (NEC) for safety in areas such as restrooms and kitchenettes. This replacement is critical to ensure that the City Hall’s electrical infrastructure is up to current safety standards and capable of handling the building's electrical load.

Four (4) new dual -port, "Level-2" EV chargers will be installed in the parking lot, west of the trash enclosure.

A diesel engine-driven emergency power generator, will be installed west of the trash enclosure.

This generator will be housed in a NEMA 3R -rated outdoor enclosure and will be accompanied by an automatic transfer switch that will feed power to a new emergency power distribution panel. This panel will provide emergency power for critical building functions. A new automatic transfer switch (ATS) and distribution panel will be provided to accommodate present and future critical loads.

A minimum 6-foot-high security fence with locked access gates will be installed. This fence will enclose the electrical equipment area, ensuring protection against unauthorized access, as the surrounding City Hall parking lot is not currently fenced (only the Police Department areas are).

Once the new utility service and power distribution system are commissioned, all supply circuits from the Police Department’s main switchboard and emergency power panel will be disconnected and capped. Any remaining buried conduits between the Police Department and City Hall will be slurry -sealed and filled to prevent water intrusion. Additionally, conduit entries into the City Hall basement electric room will be capped and sealed to eliminate further water penetration issues.

This project represents a significant upgrade to the electrical infrastructure of Gardena City Hall, ensuring that the facility is equipped to meet current and future power demands while enhancing safety, security, and operational reliability. The improvements will support the City Hall’s expanding services and provide a solid foundation for future infrastructure growth.

Working hours and work requiring power outages (See Technical Provisions)

See Technical Provisions for list of “Deferred Submittals”

Mandatory pre-bid meeting

A mandatory pre-bid meeting for this project is scheduled for Tues Sept. 16, 2025 at 9am Meeting place shall be in front of City Hall at 1700 W. 162nd St.

Only contactors who attend the meeting will be allowed to submit a bid.

ENGINEER’S ESTIMATE: $850,000

The time of completion of contract shall be [75] working days (construction) as defined in the latest Standard Specifications for Public Works (“Greenbook”). Does not include submittal, review, RFI, and order period. Liquidated Damages, as defined in Section 6- 9, shall be [$1000] per each consecutive calendar day.

Each bidder must submit a proposal to the City, c/o City Clerk in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Said proposal is to be accompanied by a cash deposit, a certified or cashier's check, or a bidder's bond, made payable to the City of Gardena, in an amount not less than 10 percent of the total bid submitted.

The envelope enclosing the proposal shall be sealed and addressed to the City of Gardena c/o City Clerk, and delivered or mailed to the City at 1700 W. 162 nd Street, Gardena, California
90247-3778. The envelope shall be plainly marked in the upper left-hand corner as follows:

ATTENTION: CITY, c/o CITY CLERK
(Bidder's Name and Address)

(Number and title of this project) ________________________

The successful bidder will be required to furnish a faithful performance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price, and a payment bond in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price, both in a form satisfactory to the City Attorney.

The contractor shall have an active Class “C10” license from the Contractor’s State License Board at the time of submitting bid.

Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 22300, the Contractor may, at Contractor's sole cost and expense, substitute securities equivalent to any monies withheld by the City to insured performance under the contract unless applicable federal regulations or policies do not allow such substitution. Such security shall be deposited with the City, or a state or federally chartered bank as escrow agent, who shall pay such monies to the Contractor upon satisfactory completion of the Contract. The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any security substituted for monies withheld and shall receive any accrued interest thereon. Securities eligible for investment shall include those listed in Government Code Section 16430 or bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit. No such substitution shall be accepted until the escrow agreement, letter of credit, form of security and any other document related to said substitution is reviewed and found acceptable by the City Attorney.

The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received and to be the sole judge of the merits of the respective bids received. The award, if made, will be made to the lowest responsive responsible bidder.

Attention is directed to the provisions of Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 of the Labor Code concerning the employment of apprentices by Contractor or any Subcontractor under it.

Contractor and any Subcontractor under if shall comply with the requirements of said sections in the employment of apprentices.

The Contractor is prohibited from performing work on this project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on the project pursuant to Section 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code.

This project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the Department of Industrial Relations. All contractors and subcontractors must furnish electronic certified payroll records directly to the Labor Commissioner (aka Division of Labor Standards Enforcement) in a format prescribed by the Labor Commissioner no less than monthly.

As of January 1, 2016, the requirement to furnish electronic certified payroll records to the Labor Commissioner will apply to all public works projects, whether new or ongoing. City may require a copy of the electronic certified payroll records submitted to the DIR at anytime.

Exceptions: The Labor Commissioner may (but is not required to) excuse contractors and subcontractors from furnishing electronic certified payroll records to the Labor Commissioner on a project that is under the jurisdiction of one of the four legacy DIR -approved labor compliance programs (Caltrans, City of Los Angeles, Los Angeles Unified School District, and County of Sacramento) or that is covered by a qualifying project labor agreement.

These requirements will apply to all public works projects that are subject to the prevailing wage requirements of the Labor Code without regard to funding source.

The State General Prevailing Wage Determination is as established by the California Department of Industrial Relations (available at http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD/index.htm).

Skilled and Trained Workforce: This project is subject to Skilled and Trained Workforce Requirements per Sections 2600 through 2603 of the Public Contract Code.

Award of Contract: The following are conditions to the award of the contract:

I. Each contractor and subcontractor listed on the bid must be r egistered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Labor Code Section 1725.5. subject to the limited exceptions set forth in Labor Code Section 1771.1(a) (regarding the submission of a bid as authorized by Business & Professions Code Section 7029.1 or Public Contract Code Section 10164 or 20103.5 provided the contractor is registered to

perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5 at the time the contract was awarded):
and
II. No contractor or subcontractor may be awarded this contract unless the contractor and each subcontractor listed on the bid is registered with the Department of Industrial Relations pursuant to Section 17265.5.

Any questions regarding this bid package may be referred to Jun De Castro, Public Works Engineering Division at 310.217.9642.

Gardena City Hall Electrical System Upgrade JN 541
1'' = 189 ft Project Location Map 08/07/2025
This map may represent a visual display of related geographic information. Data provided here is not a guarantee of actual field conditions. To ensure complete accuracy, please contact the responsible staff for the most up-to-date information.

T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
1700 W. 162nd Street
JN 541

DESCRIPTION PAGE DESCRIPTION PAGE

Title Page ....................................................................

Notice Inviting Bids ......................................................

Location Map ...............................................................

Table of Contents ................................ ........................ i Instructions to Bidders ................................................. ii-iv

BID PROPOSAL (To Be Submitted with Proposal)
Bid Schedule ............................................................... BP-2 Acknowledgement of Addenda Received ..................... BP-5 Bidder’s Declaration..................................................... BP-6 Non-collision Affidavit .................................................. BP-8 Declaration of Eligibility to Contract.............................. BP-9 Bid Bond ................................ ................................ ...... BP-10 Designation of Subcontractors ................................ ..... BP-11 Construction Project Reference ................................... BP-12 Certificate of Non-Discrimination by Contractors .......... BP-13 Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension,
Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion –
Primary Covered Transition .................................... BP-14

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (To Be Submitted after Award)
Agreement ................................ ................................... CD-2 Faithful Performance Bond .......................................... CD-4 Payment Bond ............................................................. CD-6 Workers’ Compensation Insurance Certificate ............. CD-8 Indemnification and Hold Harmless Agreement
Of Subrogation and Contribution .............................. CD-9 Insurance..................................................................... CD-10

GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................ GP-1 Section 1 – General ................................................ GP-1 Section 2 – Scope of the Work ................................ GP-4 Section 3 – Control of the Work .............................. GP-7 Section 4 – Control of Material ................................ GP-9 Section 5 – Legal Relations and Responsibilities .... GP-10 Section 6 – Prosecution and Progress of the Work .. GP-11 Section 7 – Measurement and Payment .................. GP-14 Section 8 – Facilities for Agency Personnel ............. GP-14

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
PART 2 – CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ................... TP-3 Section 200 – Rock Materials .................................. TP-3 Section 201 – Concrete, Mortar, and Related
Materials ........................................... TP-3 Section 203 – Bituminous Materials ......................... TP-3

PART 3 – CONSTRUCTION METHODS ..................... TP-3 Section 300 – Earthwork ................................ ......... TP-3 Section 302 – Roadway Surfacing ........................... TP-5 Section 314 – Traffic Striping, Curb and Pavement
Markings, and Pavement Markers ..... TP-6

PART 4 – EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS ...................... TP-6 Section 400 – Protection and Restoration................ TP-6 Section 401 – Removal ........................................... TP-7 Section 402 – Utilities .............................................. TP-8

PART 6 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ............ TP-9
Section 600 – Access .............................................. TP-9 Section 601 – Temporary Traffic Control for
Construction and Maintenance
Work Zones ................................ ...... TP-10

PART 26 – Electrical

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

FORM OF PROPOSAL

The Proposal shall be fully executed and submitted on the forms in the project specifications and shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope marked and addressed as directed in the Notice Inviting Bids.

PRPOSAL / BID DOCUMENTS

All Proposals shall include the following executed documents to be submitted with each bid:

Bidding Schedule

Acknowledgement of Addenda Received

Bidder's Declaration

Non-Collusion Affidavit

Declaration of Eligibility of Contract

Bid Bond

Designation of Subcontractors

Construction Project Reference

Certificate of Non-Discrimination by Contractors

Certification of Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – Primary Covered Transitions

DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL

The Proposal shall be delivered by the time and to the place stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids. It is the bidder's sole responsibility to see that its Proposal is received as stipulated. Any Proposal received after the scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals will be returned to the bidder unopened.

WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL

The Proposal may be withdrawn by the bidder by means of a written request, signed by the bidder or its properly authorized representative. Such written request must be delivered to the place stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids for receipt of proposals prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals. No Proposal may be withdrawn after the hour fixed for opening bids.

iii

MODIFICATIONS AND ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS

Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions attached to the Proposal will render it informal and may be grounds for its rejection as non-responsive. The completed Proposal forms shall be without interlineations, alterations, or erasures. Alternative proposals will not be considered unless specifically requested. Oral, telegraphic, or telephonic proposals or modifications will not be considered.

DISCREPANCIES IN PROPOSALS

In the event there is more than one bid item in a Bidding Schedule, the bidder shall furnish a price for all bid items in the Schedule, and failure to do so will render the Proposal informal and may be grounds for its rejection as non -responsive. The bidder shall state in words and figures the unit prices or the specific sums as the case may be, for which it proposes to supply the labor, materials, supplies, or machinery, and completely perform the Contract. The total amount of each item bid and the total amount of the bid shall be stated in words and figures.

In case of any discrepancy between the words and the figures, the words shall prevail. If the unit price and the total amount named by a bidder for any items are not in agreement, the unit price alone will be considered as representing the bidder's intention and the total will be corrected to conform thereto.

PROPOSAL GUARANTEE – BIDDER’S SECURITY

Each bidder shall submit with his Proposal cash, an unconditional certified or cashier's check, or a bidder's bond, in the sum of the percentage of the bid stated in the Notice Inviting Bids, payable to the City as a guarantee that the bidder will, if its Proposal is accepted, execute the Contract and furnish a satisfactory Faithful Performance Bond, a satisfactory Payment Bond and insurance certificates as specified herein.

If a bidder to whom an award is made, fails or refuses to sign the Contract or furnish the required bonds and certificates, all within the time stated in Section 2- 1.5 of the Special Provisions herein, the funds represented by said cash, check or bidder's bond shall be forfeited and become and remain the property of the City; the amount thereof being agreed to by the bidder and the surety as a bid bond forfeiture due to the City because of the delay in the execution of the Contract and in the performance of work thereunder, resulting from such failure or refusal, except that if the City awards the contract to the next lowest responsive responsible bidder, only that portion of the bidder's security equal to the difference between the two bids will be forfeited.

A Bid Bond must be obtained from a corporate surety authorized to do business as such in the State of California as an “admitted surety insurer” and shall be on the form furnished by the City or one substantially in conformance with it. Certified or cashier's checks must be drawn on a solvent state or nationally chartered bank or branch thereof in the State of California. The liability of the City in connection with the checks shall be limited to the return of the checks (without interest) as provided in Section 2-1.6 of the Special Provisions bound herein.

DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS

A person, firm, or corporation shall NOT be allowed to make or file, or to be interested in, more than one bid, except an alternative bid when specifically requested; provided, however, a person, firm, or corporation who has submitted a sub-proposal to a bidder submitting a Proposal, or who has quoted prices on materials to such bidders, is not thereby disqualified from submitting a sub- proposal or from quoting prices to other bidders submitting proposals, or from submitting a Proposal as a prime contractor. Similarly, failure to comply with the registration requirements of Labor Code Section 1725.5, as further described in the Notice Inviting Bids, will disqualify a bidder.

ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

The bidder's attention is directed to the Special Provisions and Technical Provisions bound herein for additional requirements of the Proposal and Contract Documents.

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Contract Documents are to be submitted within twenty-one (21) calendar days AFTER award of contract unless extended by agreement of the City . Failure to timely submit executed Contract Documents may be grounds for rejecting the bid award and forfeiture of the bid security. See enclosed documents commencing on page CD-1.

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-1

BID PROPOSAL (BP)

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE

PROJECT NO. JN 541

Contractor:

Address:

Phone:

Fax:

License No.:

D.I.R. No.

Email:

To Be Submitted

WITH

Bid Package

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-2

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541_

BID SCHEDULE

The undersigned, having examined the proposed Contract Documents titled:

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE

and having visited the site and examined the conditions affecting the work, hereby proposes and agrees to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and appliances, and to perform operations necessary to complete the work as required by said proposed Contract Documents and itemized bid schedule below . All work shall be completed within [ 75] working days (construction) as defined in the latest Standard Specifications for Public Works (“Greenbook”).

Does not include submittal, review, RFI, and order period. Working Days shall begin once Notice to Proceed is issued by the Engineer.

Item
No.

Item Description

Unit
Approx.

Quantity
Unit Price
in Figures

Item Total
1 Construct per plans (7 pages) and
specifications
LS 1 $

2 Community Development Department
Permit Fee
LS 1 $ 1,133.20 $ 1,133.20
3 Mobilization (Maximum 2%) LS 1 $ $
4 General Conditions (Maximum 2%) LS 1 $ $
5 Construct per SCE plans (2 pages) and
coordination with SCE
LS 1 $ $

TOTAL CONTRACT BID:

(Figures) $

(Words) ______

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-3

BID SCHEDULE (Continued)

* In case of error in extension of price into the total price column, the unit price will govern.

All work required and shown on the construction plans and this specification for which no price or item is listed on this proposal, it shall be understood that such work, equipment, labor, tools and materials shall be provided without extra charge, allowance or direct payment of any kind. Payment for performing such work or furnishing such equipment, labor, tools and materials shall be included in the above lump sum or unit bid prices and no additional compensation will paid therefor. The contractor is required to submit a detailed schedule of values within fourteen (14) calendar days after award of contract. City has the discretion to reject the schedule of values for revisions if deemed bid items are unbalanced.

If the City determines that any of the unit bid prices are significantly unbalanced to the potential detriment of the City, the bid will be replaced as non-responsive.

In case of any discrepancy between the words and the figures, the words shall prevail. If the unit price and the total amount for any item are not in agreement, the unit price alone shall be considered to represent the bidder’s intention and all totals will be corrected to conform thereto.

Attached hereto is cash, a certified check, a cashier's check, or a bidder's bond in the amount of _______________________________________________________________________Dollar s, said amount being not less than 10 percent of the amount bid. Pursuant to Public Contract Code Sections 20172 and 20174, it is agreed a portion equal to the difference between the low bid and second low bid shall be retained as a bid bond forfeiture by the City if the undersigned fails or refuses to execute the Contract and furnish the required bonds and certificates of insurance within the time provided.

Name of Bidder

Signature of Bidder

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-4

BID PROPSOAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA RECEIVED

The Bidder shall acknowledge the receipt of addenda by number and date each addendum received.

Addendum No. ____ Date ___________ Addendum No. ____ Date ___________ Addendum No. ____ Date ___________ Addendum No. ____ Date ___________ Addendum No. ____ Date ___________ Addendum No. ____ Date ___________

Addenda will be issued only through the ARC Document Solutions and access under their “Planrooms”/”Order From Planwell” (https://www.e-arc.com/location/costa-mesa/). It is the Bidder’s sole responsibility to visit the Planroom to obtain and administer any Addendum related to this bid. An Addendum must be acknowledged above by a bidder in its submitted form of Proposal.

If an addendum or addenda has been issued by the City and not noted above as being received by the Bidder, the Bid Proposal may be rejected.

____________________________________ _____________________________ Bidder’s Signature Date

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-5

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

BIDDER'S DECLARATION

It is understood and agreed that:

1. The undersigned has carefully examined all documents which will form a part of the Contract; namely, the Notice Inviting Bids, the Instructions to Bidders, this Proposal, the Bid Bond, the Contract, the Faithful Performance Bond, the Payment Bond, the federal requirements, if any, the Plans and Specifications, the Special Provisions, and the Technical Provisions.

2. The undersigned has, by investigation at the site of the work and otherwise, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work and fully informed himself as to all conditions and matters, which can in any way affect the work or the cost thereof.

3. The undersigned fully understands the scope of work and has checked carefully all words and figures inserted in this Proposal and he further understands that the City will not be responsible for any errors or omissions in the preparation of the Proposal.

4. The undersigned agrees and acknowledges that he is aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self -insurance in accordance with the provisions of that Code, and that the undersigned will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the Contract if it is awarded to the undersigned.

The undersigned will execute the Contract and furnish the required statutory bonds and certificates of insurance within the period of time specified in the Contract Documents.

The undersigned will begin work after award of Contract and a Notice to Proceed has been given as herein specified and will complete said work within the time specified in the Bidding Schedule.

5. The undersigned certifies that this Proposal is genuine and not sham or collusive, or made in the interest or on behalf of a person not herein named, and the undersigned has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a sham bid nor induced any other person, firm, or corporation to refrain from bidding. The undersigned has not in any manner sought by collusion to secure for himself any advantage over any other bidder.

6. The undersigned will accept an award and enter into a Contract for all work scheduled herein on which he puts in a bid. The awards for such work are to be entirely at the discretion of the City after evaluation of the bids as submitted. The undersigned agrees that the City shall recover or retain as a bid bond forfeiture an amount equal to the difference between the low bid and amount of the bid of the bidder with whom the City enters into a Contract, and the surplus, if any, shall be returned to the lowest bidder in accordance with the provisions of the Public Contract Code Sections 20172 and 20174 in the event of his failure to execute a Contract and furnish required bonds and insurance therefor within the time provided.

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-6

BIDDER'S DECLARATION (Continued)

7. The undersigned bidder stated under penalty of perjury that the representations made in submitting this bid are, to the best of his/her knowledge, true, accurate, and complete.

Respectfully submitted,

_______________________________ ______________________________________ Contractor's Business Name Contractor (Print) Title

________________________________ ______________________________________ Business Address: Street Signature Title

________________________________ ______________________________________ City State Zip Contractor's License No. and Classification

________________________________ ______________________________________ Business Phone Number Business Fax Number

Date

________________________________ ______________________________________ Name Title Residence: Street

________________________________ ______________________________________ City State Zip Residence Phone Number

Note: If the bid is made by an individual, it must be signed with the full name of the bidder, whose address must be given: if it is made by a firm, it must be signed in the co- partnership's name by a general partner thereof, who shall also sign his or her own name, and the name and full address of each partner (general and/or limited) must be given; and if it is made by a corporation, it must be signed by a properly authorized officer, the corporate name shall be set forth, and the corporate seal shall be affixed.

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-7

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
(To be executed by Bidder and submitted with Bid)

State of California

County of Los Angeles

being first duly sworn, deposes and
says that he or she is of
the party making the foregoing bid, that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on the behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay fee to any corporation, or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.

NAME OF BIDDER

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER

ADDRESS OF BIDDER

CITY STATE ZIP

ALL SIGNATURES MUST BE WITNESSED BY NOTARY
(attach appropriate jurats)

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-8

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

DECLARATION OF ELIGIBILITY TO CONTRACT
[Labor Code Section 1777.1; Public Contract Code Section 6109]

The undersigned, a duly authorized representative of the contractor, certifies and declares that:

1. The undersigned contractor is aware of Sections 1777.1 and 1777.7 of the California Labor Code, which prohibit a contractor or subcontractor who has been found by the Labor Commissioner or the Director of Industrial Relations to be in violation of certain provisions of the Labor Code, from bidding on, being awarded, or performing work as a subcontractor on a public works project for specified periods of time.

2. The undersigned contractor is not ineligible to bid on, be awarded or perform work as a subcontractor on a public works project by virtue of Sections 1771.1 or 1777.7 of the California Labor Code or any other provision of law.

3. The undersigned contractor is aware of California Public Contract Code Section 6109, which states:

“(a) A public entity, as defined in Section 1100 [of the Public Contract Code], may not permit a contractor or subcontractor who is ineligible to bid or work on, or be awarded, a public works project pursuant to Section 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code to bid on, be awarded, or perform work as a subcontractor on, a public works project. Every public works project shall contain a provision prohibiting a contractor from performing work on a public works project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on the public works project pursuant to Section 1771.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code.”

“(b) Any contract on a public works project entered into between a contractor and a debarred subcontractor is void as a matter of law. A debarred subcontractor may not receive any public money for performing work as a subcontractor on a public works contract, and any public money that may have been paid to a debarred subcontractor by a contractor on the project shall be returned to the awarding body. The contractor shall be responsible for the payment of wages to workers of a debarred subcontractor who has been allowed to work on the project.”

4. The undersigned contractor has investigated the eligibility of each and every subcontractor the undersigned contractor intends to use on this public works project, and has determined that none of them are ineligible to perform work as a subcontractor on a public works project by virtue of the foregoing provisions of the Public Contract Code, Sections 1771.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code, or any other provision of law.

I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed this ______ day of _________, 20 _, at _________ _______ ________ (place of execution),
California__________.

Signature: ____________________________ Name: _________________________________

Title: ________________________________ Company: ______________________________

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-9

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

THAT , as Principal,
and , as Surety,
are held firmly bound unto the City of Gardena in the sum of $ ;

DOLLARS,
(not less than ten percent of total amount of bid)
for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, said Principal has submitted a bid to the City to perform all work required under the following:

PROJECT: GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
1700 W. 162nd Street
JN 541

NOW, THEREFORE, if said Principal is awarded a Contract by the City and, within the time and in the manner required in the Specifications for said project, enters into the written form of Contract bound with said Specifications and furnishes the required bonds, one to guarantee faithful performance and the other to guarantee payment for labor and materials, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the City and judgment is recovered, said Surety shall pay all costs incurred by the City in such suit, including a reasonable attorneys’ fee to be fixed by the court. Surety hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code §2845.

SIGNED AND SEALED, this day of , 20 .

(SEAL) (SEAL)
Principal Surety

BY: BY:

Signature Signature

Note: This bond must be dated, all signatures must be notarized, and evidence of the authority of any person signing as attorney–in-fact must be attached.

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-10

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS

In compliance with the "Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act" being Sections 4100- 4113 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, and any amendments thereto, each bidder shall set forth below the name and location of the place of busi ness of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improvement in an amount in excess of one -half (1/2) of one percent (1%) of the prime contractor's total bid, and shall further set forth the portion of the work which will be done by each subcontractor. Only one subcontractor for each such portion shall be listed.

If the contractor fails to specify a subcontractor for any portion of the work to be performed under the contract, he shall be deemed to have agreed to perform such portion himself, and he shall not be permitted to subcontract that portion of the work except under the conditions hereinafter set forth.

Subletting or subcontracting of any portion of the work to which subcontractor was designated in the original bid shall only be permitted in cases of public emergency or necessity, and then only after a finding reduced to writing as a public record of the legislative body of the City .

Portion
of Work
% Subcontractor's Name & Address
Type of
Work
State
License
Number Class
D.I.R.

Number

Not more than _____%.

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-11

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

CONSTRUCTION PROJECT REFERENCE

In order to more fully evaluate your background and experience for the project herein proposed, please submit a list of Public Works and/or similar construction projects completed or in progress within the last three (3) years. Failure to provide this information may constitute grounds for rejection of your bid as non-responsive.

Number of years as a contractor in construction work of this type:

Three projects of this type recently completed:

1. Name (Firm/Agency):

Address:

Contact Person: Telephone No.:

Title of Project:

Project Location:

Date of Completion: Contract Amount: $

2. Name (Firm/Agency):

Address:

Contact Person: Telephone No.:

Title of Project:

Project Location:

Date of Completion: Contract Amount: $

3. Name (Firm/Agency):

Address:

Contact Person: Telephone No.:

Title of Project:

Project Location:

Date of Completion: Contract Amount: $

NOTE: If requested by the City, the bidder shall furnish a certified financial statement, references, and other information sufficiently comprehensive to permit an appraisal of his current financial condition.

Bidder's Signature

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-12

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

CERTIFICATE OF NON-DISCRIMINATION BY CONTRACTORS

As suppliers of goods or services to the City, the firm listed below certifies that it does not discriminate in its employment with regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin; that it is in compliance with all applicable federal, state, and local directives, and executive orders regarding non -discrimination in employment; and that it agrees to pursue posi tively and aggressively the principle of equal opportunity in employment.

We agree specifically:

1. To establish or observe employment policies which affirmatively promote opportunities for minority persons at all job levels.

2. To communicate this policy to all persons concerned, including all company employees, outside recruiting services, especially those serving minority communities, and to the minority communities at large.

3. To take affirmative steps to hire minority employees within the company.

FIRM

TITLE OF PERSON SIGNING

SIGNATURE

DATE

Please include any additional information available regarding equal opportunity employment programs now in effect within your company:

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-13

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT NO. JN 541

CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION – PRIMARY COVERED TRANSACTIONS

(BEFORE COMPLETING CERTIFICATION, READ INSTRUCTIONS ON NEXT PAGE)

The Contractor shall not perform Work with any Subcontractor that has been debarred or suspended pursuant to California Labor Code Section 1777.1 or any other federal or State law providing for the debarment of contractors from public works. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall not be debarred or suspended throughout the duration of the Contract pursuant to Labor Code Section 1777.1 or any other federal or State law providing for the debarment of contractors from public works. If the Contractor or any Subcontractor becomes debarred or suspended during the duration of the Project, the Contractor shall immediately notify the City.

1. The prospective primary participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals:

a. Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal department or agency;

b. Have not within a 5 -year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statement, or receiving stolen property;

c. Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a governmental entity (Federal, State or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph 1b of this certification; and

d. Have not within a 5 -year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public transactions (Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default.

2. Where the prospective primary participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.

Signature: ____________________________ Name: _________________________________

Title: ________________________________ Company: ______________________________

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-14

CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION – PRIMARY COVERED TRANSACTIONS
(Continued)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR CERTIFICATION

1. By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective primary participant is providing the certification set out below.

2. The inability of a person to provide the certification required below will not necessarily result in denial of participation in this covered transaction. The prospective participant shall submit an explanation of why it cannot provide the certification set out below. The certification or explanation will be considered in connection with the department or agency's determination whether to enter into this transaction. However, failure of the prospective primary participant to furnish a certification or an explanation shall disqualify such person from participation in this transaction.

3. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when the department or agency determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later determined that the prospective primary participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause or default.

4. The prospective primary participant shall provide immediate written notice to the department or agency to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective primary participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.

5. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "lower tier covered transaction," "participant," "person," "primary covered transaction," "principal," "proposal," and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of the rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the department or agency to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations (13 CFR Part 145).

6. The prospective primary participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency entering into this transaction.

7. The prospective primary participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include the clause titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-- Lower Tier Covered Transactions," provided by the department or agency entering into this covered transaction, without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions.

8. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the ineligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Nonprocurement List.

9. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.

10. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph 6 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause or default.

CD-1

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (CD)

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE

PROJECT NO. JN 541

To be Submitted
within twenty-one (21) calendar days

AFTER
Award of Contract

CD-2

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

PROJECT NO. JN 541

AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of , 20 , by and between CITY OF GARDENA in the State of California, hereinafter referred to as “CITY” and , hereinafter referred to as “CONTRACTOR.”

The City and the Contractor mutually agree as follows:

ARTICLE I.

THE PROJECT
For and in consideration of the mutual promises set forth herein, Contractor agrees to perform and complete in a good and workmanlike manner all work required by the Contract Documents for City Project No. JN 541 , which is described as follows:

Title: GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
(1700 W. 162nd STREET)

JN 541

Said work shall be performed in accordance with the Plans, Specifications and other Contract Documents, all of which are referenced in Article III hereof and incorporated herein as though fully set forth. Contractor shall furnish at its own expense all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary therefor, except such labor, materials, equipment and services as are provided in the Contract Documents to be furnished by City.

This project is subject to Skilled and Trained Workforce Requirements per Sections 2600 through 2603 of the Public Contract Code.

ARTICLE II.

CONTRACT SUM AND PAYMENT
For performing and completing the work in accordance with the Contract Documents, City shall pay Contractor, in full compensation therefor, the contract sum set forth in the Bidding Schedule. Said sum shall constitute payment in full for all work performed hereunder, including, without limitation, all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services used or incorporated in the work, supervision, administration, overhead, expenses and any and all other things required, furnished or incurred for completion of the work as specified in the Contract Documents. City shall make payments to Contractor on account of the contract sum at the time, in the manner, and upon the conditions specified in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE III.

CD-3

issued prior to and all modifications issued after the execution of this Agreement. These form the Contract, and all are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein.

ARTICLE IV.

EFFECTIVE DATE
This Agreement shall become effective and commence as of the date set forth below on which the last of the parties, whether City or Contractor, executes said Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed and attested by their proper officers thereunto duly authorized.

CITY CONTRACTOR

Tasha Cerda, Mayor Name & Title

Date: ______ Sign:_________
Seal: Date:

SECOND SIGNATURE: (Contractor)

___________________________________
Name & Title

ATTEST: Sign:_______________________________
Date:

Mina Semenza, City Clerk

Date:

APPROVED AS TO FORM:

Carmen Vasquez, City Attorney

Date:

CD-4

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

PROJECT NO. JN 541

FAITHFUL PERFORMANCE BOND

WHEREAS, the City of Gardena has awarded to ___ _____, hereinafter designated as the "Principal", a Contract for:

PROJECT: GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
(1700 W. 162nd STREET)

JN 541

WHEREAS, said Principal is required under the terms of said Contract to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said Contract;

NOW, THEREFORE, we,
as Principal, and
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City in the sum of

Dollars ($ ), this amount being not
less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract price, lawful money of the United States of America, for payment of which sum well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

In case suit is brought upon this bond, the Surety will pay all court costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees to the City of Gardena in an amount to be fixed by the court.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if the hereby bounded Principal, his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, well and truly keep and perform all the undertakings, terms, covenants, conditions and agreements in the said Contract and any alteration thereof, made as therein provided, all within the time and in the manner therein designated and in all res pects according to their true intent and meaning, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect.

FURTHER, the Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, addition, or modification to the terms of the Contract, or of the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications for the same, shall in any way affect its obligations under this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration, addition, or modification to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the specifications thereunder. Surety hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code §§ 2845 and 2849. The City is the principal beneficiary of this bond and has all rights of a party hereto.

CD-5

This bond shall remain in full force and effect for a warranty period of one full year after acceptance of the job by the City.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, three (3) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of which shall for all purposes be deemed an original thereof, have been duly executed by the Principal and

Surety named herein, on the day of , 20 , the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative pursuant to authority of its governing body.

[PRINCIPAL]

By
Title

Signature

[SURETY]

By
Title

Address

Phone No.

Signature

All signatures must be notarized.

Appropriate modifications shall be made to this form if the bond is being furnished for the performance of an act not provided for by agreement.

Corporations must affix corporate seal.

CD-6

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

PROJECT NO. JN 541

PAYMENT BOND

WHEREAS, the City of Gardena has awarded to , as Contractor, a contract for the work described as follows:

PROJECT: GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
(1700 W. 162nd STREET)

JN 541

AND WHEREAS, said Contractor is required to furnish a bond in connection with said contract, to secure the payment of claims of laborers, mechanics, materialmen and other persons, as provided by law;

NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Contractor and Surety, are held firmly bound unto the City in the sum of ,
Dollars ($ _____ ) this amount being not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract price, for which payment well and truly to be made we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors and administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if said Contractor, its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, assigns, or subcontractors shall fail to pay any of the persons named in Civil Code Section 3181, or amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed under the contract, or any amounts required to be deducted, withheld, and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the Contractor and its subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code, or any other amounts due to persons under any applicable project contract or law, with respect to such work and labor, then the Surety or Sureties herein will pay for the same in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in this bond, otherwise the above obligation shall be void. In case suit is brought upon this bond, the said Surety will pay all court costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees to the plaintiff(s) and City in an amount to be fixed by the court.

This bond shall inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in Civil Code Section 3181 as to give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond.

Further, the Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, addition, or modification to the terms of the Contract, or of the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications for the same, shall in any way affect its obligations under this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of such change, extension of time, alteration, addition, or modification to the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the specifications thereunder. Surety hereby waives the provisions of California Civil Code §§ 2845 and 2849.

CD-7

This bond shall remain in full force and effect for six full months after the period in which verified claims may be filed as provided for in Section 3184 of the California Civil Code.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals on this day of 20 .

[PRINCIPAL]

By
Title

Signature

[SURETY]

By
Title

Address

Phone No.

Signature

All signatures must be notarized.

Appropriate modifications shall be made to this form if the bond is being furnished for the performance of an act not provided for by agreement.

Corporations must affix corporate seal.

CD-8

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

PROJECT NO. JN 541

WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE CERTIFICATE

The Contractor shall execute the following form as required by the California Labor Code, Sections 1860 and 1861:

I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that Code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of the Contract.

DATED:

CONTRACTOR

By
Signature

Title

ATTEST:

By
Signature

Title

CD-9

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

PROJECT NO. JN 541

INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT

AND WAIVER OF SUBROGATION AND CONTRIBUTION

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE

To the fullest extent permitted by law, Indemnitor hereby agrees, at its sole cost and expense, to defend, protect, indemnify, and hold harmless the City of Gardena and its respective elected officials, officers, attorneys, agents, employees, volunteers, successors, and assigns (collectively “Indemnitees”) from and against any and all damages, costs, expenses, liabilities, claims, demands, causes of action, proceedings, expenses, judgments, penalties, liens, and losses of any nature whatsoever, including fees of accountants, attorneys, or other professionals and all costs associated therewith (collectively “Liabilities”), arising or claimed to arise, directly or indirectly, out of, in connection with, resulting from, or related to any act, failure to act, error, or omission of Indemnitor or any of its officers, agents, servants, employees, subcontractors, materialmen, suppliers or their officers, agents, servants or employees, arising or claimed to arise, directly or indirectly, out of, in connection with, resulting from, or related to the above-referenced contract, agreement, license, or permit (the “Agreement”) or the performance or failure to perform any term, provision, covenant, or condition of the Agreement, including this indemnity provision. This indemnity provision is effective regardless of any prior, concurrent, or subsequent active or passive negligence by Indemnitees and shall operate to fully indemnify Indemnitees against any such negligence. This indemnity provision shall survive the termination of the Agreement and is in addition to any other rights or remedies which Indemnitees may have under the law. Payment is not required as a condition precedent to an Indemnitee’s right to recover under this indemnity provision, and an entry of judgment against an Indemnitee shall be conclusive in favor of the Indemnitee’s right to recover under this indemnity provision. Indemnitor shall pay Indemnitees for any attorney fees and costs incurred in enforcing this indemnification provision. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this instrument shall be construed to encompass (a) Indemnitees’ sole negligence or willful misconduct to the limited extent that the underlying Agreement is subject to Civil Code 2782(a), or (b) the contracting public agency’s active negligence to the limited extent that the underlying Agreement is subject to Civil Code 2782(b). This indemnity is effective without reference to the existence or applicability of any insurance coverages which may have been required under the Agreement or any additional insured endorsements which may extend to Indemnitees.

Indemnitor, on behalf of itself and all parties claiming under or through it, hereby waives all rights of subrogation and contribution against the Indemnitees, while acting within the scope of their duties, from all claims, losses and liabilities arising out of or incident to activities or operations performed by or on behalf of the Indemnitor regardless of any prior, concurrent, or subsequent active or passive negligence by the Indemnitees. Accountants, attorneys, or other professionals employed by Indemnitor to defend Indemnitees shall be selected by Indemnitees.

In the event there is more than one person or entity named in the Agreement as an Indemnitor, then all obligations, liabilities, covenants and conditions under this instrument shall be joint and several.

“Indemnitor”

Company/Contractor

Name & Title

Signature & Date

CD-10

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

PROJECT NO. JN 541

INSURANCE

CERTIFICATION OF INSURANCE (COI) SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR

1. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. Contractor shall not be authorized to commence Work under this Contract until it has obtained approved insurance. Before beginning Work hereunder, during the entire period of this Contract, for any extensions hereto, and for periods after the end of this Contract as may be indicated below, Contractor must have and maintain in place not less than the insurance coverages required in this Section at his sole cost and expense. Contractor’s insurance shall comply with all items specified by this Contract. Any subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements of this Section and Contractor shall be responsible to obtain evidence of insurance from each subcontractor and provide it to City before the subcontractor commences work. Alternatively, Contractor’s insurance may cover all subcontractors. The insurance requirements are not intended to and shall not in any manner limit or qualify the liabilities and obligations assumed by Contractor under this Contract.

2. INSURANCE COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. All insurance policies used to satisfy the requirements imposed hereunder shall be issued by insurers admitted to do business in the State of California. Insurers shall have a current Best’s rating of not less than A -:VII, unless otherwise approved by City.

3. COVERAGES, LIMITS AND POLICY REQUIREMENTS . Contractor shall maintain the types of coverages indicated below:

4. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE . A policy of comprehensive general liability insurance written on a per occurrence basis in an amount not less than either one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence or two million dollars ($2,000,000) aggregate.

5. COMMERCIAL AUTO LIABILITY INSURANCE . A policy including all coverages provided by and to the extent afforded by Insurance Services Office form CA 0001, ed. 12/93, including Symbol 1 (any auto) with no special limitations affecting City. The minimum auto insurance coverage shall be one million dollars ($1,000,000) combined single limit per accident.

6. WORKER’S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE . A policy which meets all statutory benefit requirements of the Labor Code, or other applicable law, of the State of California. The minimum coverage limits for said insurance shall be no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per claim. The policy shall be issued by an insurance company which is admitted to do business in the State of California and shall contain a clause that the policy may not be canceled without thirty (30) days prior written notice, return receipt requested, is mailed to City.

In accordance with the provisions of section 1860 of the California Labor Code, Contractor's attention is directed to the requirement that in accordance with the provisions of section 3700 of the California Labor Code, Contractor and every subcontractor will be required to secure the payment of compensation of his or her employees, or obtain a certificate of

CD-11

consent to self -insurance by the Director of Industrial Relations in accordance with the requirements of Section 3700 of the California Labor Code.

In accordance with the provisions of section 1861 of the California Labor Code, Contractor shall sign and file with the awarding body the following certification prior to performing any work on the Project:

"I am aware of the provisions of section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for worker's compensation or to undertake self -insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this contract."

7. POLICY REQUIREMENTS. The policies set forth above shall comply with the following, as evidenced by the policies or endorsements to the policies:

(i) City and its appointed and elected officers, employees, agents and volunteers shall be added as additional insured to the policy as respects liabilities arising out of the performance of any work done under the Contract.

(ii) The insurer shall agree to provide City with thirty (30) days prior written notice, return receipt requested, of any cancellation, non -renewal or material change in coverage.

(iii) For any claims with respect to the Project covered by this Contract, Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects City and its elected and appointed officers, employees, agents and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by City and its elected and appointed officers, employees, agents and volunteers shall be excess of Contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute with it.

(iv) The policy shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the company’s liability.

8. COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION INSURANCE . Contractor shall provide course of construction insurance covering for “all risks” of loss in the amount of the completed value of the Work. The City shall be named as a loss payee and the insurer shall waive all rights of subrogation against the City. This policy shall be issued by an insurance company which is admitted to do business in the State of California and shall contain a clause that the policy may not be canceled until thirty (30) days written notice, return receipt requested, is mailed to the City. Course of Construction Insurance may be provided for each separate Phase.

9. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS . The procuring of required insurance shall not be construed to limit Contractor’s liability hereunder nor to fulfill the indemnification provisions and requirements of this Contract. City shall notify Contractor in writing of changes in the insurance requirements. If Contractor does not deposit copies of acceptable insurance policies or endorsements with City incorporating such changes within sixty (60) days of receipt of such notice, Contractor shall be deemed in default hereunder.

10. DEDUCTIBLES. Any deductible or self -insured retentions must be declared to and approved by City. Contractor shall guarantee that, at the option of the City, either: the insurer shall eliminate or reduce such deductibles or self -insured retentions with respect to City, its officers, employees, agents and volunteers (with additional premium, if any, to be paid by Contractor); or Contractor shall provide satisfactory financial guarantee for payment

CD-12

of losses and related investigations, claim administration and defense expenses in the amount of any deductibles or self-insured retentions.

11. VERIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE . Contractor shall furnish City with the required endorsements attached hereto. All documents are to be received and approved by City before Work commences. Not less than fifteen (15) days prior to the expiration date of any policy of insurance required by this Contract, Contractor shall deliver to City a binder or certificate of insurance with respect to each renewal policy, bearing a notation evidencing payment of the premium therefore, or accompanied by other proof of payment satisfactory to City. Contractor shall provide full copies of any requested policies to City within three (3) days of any such request by City.

12. TERMINATION FOR LACK OF REQUIRED COVERAGE. If Contractor, for any reason, fails to have in place, at all times during the term of this Contract, including any extension hereto, all required insurance and coverage, City may immediately obtain such coverage at Contractor’s expense and/or terminate this Contract. Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless City and its elected and appointed officers, employees, agents and volunteers from any claim resulting from failure of either Contractor or any subcontractor to take out or maintain any insurance required by this Contract.

13. EQUIPMENT COVERAGE . Any policy or policies of insurance Contractor or his subcontractors elect to carry as insurance against loss or damage to construction equipment and tools or other personal property shall include a provision waiving the insurer’s right of subrogation against City.

GP-1

GENERAL PROVISIONS

GARDENA CITY HALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS UPGRADE
1700 W. 162nd Street
JN 541

PART 1 – GENERAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 1 – GENERAL

1-1 GENERAL. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (“Greenbook”) written and promulgated by the Southern California Chapter of the American Public Works Association and the Southern California Districts of the Associated General Contractors of California shall be the Standard Specifications of the City. All work shall conform to the 2021 edition, including supplements of the Standard Specifications , the Special Provisions which supplement or modify the Standard Specifications, and the Standard Drawings as issued by the City (defined herein as “Agency”) available at the time bids are opened unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.

The above referenced Standard Specifications, Special Provisions and Standard Drawings are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents.

For the convenience of the Contractor, the section and subsection numbering system used in these Special Provisions corresponds to that used in the Standard Specifications.

1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS. Whenever in the Standard Specification the following terms are used, they shall be understood to mean and refer to the following:

(a) AGENCY The City of Gardena, a California municipal corporation.

(b) BOARD The City Council of the City of Gardena

(c) CONTRACT Documents including but not limited to the proposal forms, DOCUMENTS Standard “Greenbook” Specifications, Special Provisions, Technical Provisions, Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bonds, Insurance, Contract and all Addenda
setting forth any modifications of the documents.

(d) ENGINEER The City of Gardena Director of Public Works/City Engineer or his authorized representative.

(e) BIDDER An individual, co-partnership, association or corporation submitting a proposal for the work contemplated, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative.

(f) LEGAL ADDRESS The legal address of the Contractor to be the address OF CONTRACTOR given on the Contractor’s bid and is hereby designated as the place to which all notices, letters or other
communications to the Contractor shall be mailed or
delivered.

(g) LABORATORY An established laboratory approved and authorized by the Engineer for testing materials and work involved in the contract.

GP-2

1-7 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT.

1-7.1 General. The proposal shall be fully executed and submitted on the forms provided by the Agency and shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope marked and addressed as directed in the “Notice Inviting Bids”.

If the proposal is made by an individual, it shall be signed and his or her full name and address shall be given; if it is made by a firm it shall be signed with co- partnership name by a general partner thereof, who shall also sign his or her known name, and the name and address of each member of such co -partnership shall be given; if made by a corporation, the name of the corporation shall be signed by its duly authorized officers and attested by the corporate seal.

Bidders are warned against making erasures or alterations of any kind on their Proposal.

Proposals which contain omissions, erasures, alterations, conditions or additions not called for may be rejected.

At the time the Contract is awarded by the Agency, the Contractor shall be licensed under the provisions of Chapter 9, Division 3, of the Business and Professions Code of the State of California to do the type of work contemplated in the Contract and shall be skilled and regularly engaged in the general class or type of work required by this Contract.

1-7.2 Contract Bonds. The “Performance Bond” is equivalent to City’s “Faithful Performance Bond”.

1-7.3 Examination of Plans, Specifications and Project Site. Bidders shall read the specifications, review the drawings and examine the existing facilities to fully understand the project in order to plan for the improvements as shown in the contract, including local condition, uncertainty of weather and all other contingencies.

Bidders shall satisfy themselves by personal examination of the proposed work sites, and by such other means as they may choose as to actual conditions and requirements and as to the accuracy of the quantities stated in the Proposal forms. Information derived from the maps, plans, specifications, profiles, drawings, or from the Engineer /Architect of the record, shall not relieve the bidder of this responsibility, and the interpretation of the data disclosed by borings or other preliminary investigations is not guaranteed nor is any liability assumed by the Agency.

1-7.4 Interpretation of Drawings and Documents. If a prospective bidder is in doubt as to the true meaning or intent of any part of the Contract Documents including the Specifications, or discovers discrepancies in, or omissions from, the Specifications or Drawings, he may submit to the Engineer a written request for an interpretation or a correction thereof. Interpretations or corrections of the Contract Documents including the Specifications and Drawings, shall be made only by addendum duly issued by the Engineer, and a copy of such addendum will be sent by certified mail, postage prepaid, or delivered to each person receiving a set of the Contract Documents whose address is known to the Engineer and such addendum shall be considered a part of and incorporated in the Contract Documents.

1-7.5 Award of Contract . After the Proposals have been publicly opened and read aloud, they will be checked for accuracy and compliance with all provisions as specified herein.

The Agency reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any bid received and to be the sole judge of the merits of the respective bids received.

Bids subsequently shown to be mathematically unbalanced would be rejected as GP-3
nonresponsive.

A mathematically unbalanced bid is one containing lump sum or unit bid items which do not reflect reasonable actual costs plus a reasonable proportionate share of the bidder’s anticipated profit, overhead costs, and other indirect costs, which he/she anticipates for the performance of the items in question.

“A bid is mathematically unbalanced if the bid is structured on the basis of nominal prices for some work and inflated prices for other work; that is, each element of the bid must carry its proportionate share of the total cost of the work plus profits.”

“A bid is materially unbalanced if there is a reasonable doubt that award to the bidder submitting the mathematically unbalanced bid will result in the lowest ultimate cost to the Government.

Consequently, a materially unbalanced bid may not be accepted.”

Award of the Contract, if it be awarded, will ordinarily be made by the Agency within 30 days after opening of the bids. Award will be made to the lowest responsive responsible bidder.

In selecting the lowest responsive responsible bidder, consideration will be given to the general competency of the bidder for the performance of the work covered by the proposal. To receive favorable consideration, a bidder may be required to present evidence that he has successfully performed similar work of comparable magnitude or submit other evidence satisfactory to the Agency that he or his associates are competent to manage the proposed undertaking and to carry it forward to a successful conclusion. Professional integrity and honesty of purpose shall be essential requirements. A showing of adequate financial resources may be required but will not alone determine whether a bidder is competent to undertake the proposed work.

Only manufacturers or contractors of established reputation, or their duly authorized dealers or agency, having proper facilities for the manufacture of the materials or equipment and for servicing same, or for proper execution of the work called for in the contract, will be considered in making the award.

1-7.6 Execution of Contract . A bidder whose proposal is accepted shall properly sign a written contract with the Agency on the form attached hereto and return said contract together with good and approved bonds and insurance certificates as required by the Contract Documents within twenty-one (21) calendar days from the date of the mailing of a notice from the Agency to the bidder, according to the address given by him, of acceptance of his proposal.

Contract bonds and certificates of insurance, if required, shall be filed in all instances before delivering any equipment, materials, or performing any work under the contract; also before any purchase order shall be issued. An executed Power of Attorney form shall be submitted with all contract bonds herein specified.

If a bidder whose proposal is accepted fails or refuses to enter into a contract as herein provided, or to conform to any stipulated requirement in connection therewith, the money represented by his check or bidder’s bond shall be refunded less the difference between the low bid and the bid of the bidder with whom the Agency enters into an agreement in accordance with the provisions of the Public Contracts Code Section 20174. At the discretion of the Agency, an award may be made to the bidder whose proposal is next most acceptable to the Agency, and such bidder and his surety shall fulfill every stipulation embraced herein as if he were the party to whom the first award was made.

A corporation to which an award is made may be required before the contract is finally signed to furnish evidence of its corporate existence, of its right to do business in California and of the authority of the officer signing the contract and bonds for the corporation to so sign.

GP-4

1-7.7 Return of Proposal and Guarantee. The check or bond of a bidder to whom the contract has been awarded will be returned to him after all of the acts, for the performance of which said security is required, have been fully performed. The checks or bid bonds of the second and third lowest bidders will be returned when the bidder to whom the contract has been awarded has properly executed all of the required Contract Documents. Check or bid bonds of other bidders will be returned when their proposals are rejected or in any event at the expiration of forty-five (45) days from the date of opening bids.

1-7.8 Precedence of Contract Documents. The order of precedence of contract document shall be:

FIRST Requirements of law, including the Code and Ordinances of the City of Gardena.

SECOND Permits from other agencies as may be required by law.

THIRD Permits from City of Gardena Departments as may be required by law or ordinance.

FOURTH The Contract.

FIFTH The Bid Proposal.

SIXTH Addenda.

SEVENTH Notice Inviting Bids.

EIGHTH Instructions to Bidders.

NINTH Technical Provisions.

TENTH Plans.

ELEVENTH General Provisions of the Standard Specifications.

TWELFTH Standard Plans.

THIRTEENTH Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition).

FOURTEENTH Caltrans Standard Plans and Specifications.

FIFTEENTH Reference Specifications.

Change orders, supplemental agreements and approved revisions to Plans and Specifications will take precedence over documents listed above, except those listed as FIRST, SECOND and THIRD. Detailed plans shall have precedence over general plans.

SECTION 2 – SCOPE OF THE WORK

2-2 PERMITS. The Contractor will obtain, at no cost to the Agency, all permits necessary to perform the work on streets, highways, railways or other rights -of-ways. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all costs incurred for permits necessitated by its operations such as, but not GP-5
limited to those permits required for night work, overload, blasting and demolition. For private contracts, the Contractor shall obtain all permits incidental to the work or made necessary by its operations, and pay all costs incurred by the permit requirements.

The Contractor and each subcontractor employed upon the work must have or obtain a valid City of Gardena Business License in accordance with the provisions of the Gardena Municipal Code.

The project is subject to permit(s) from the Community Development Department. Contractor is required to pull the applicable project permits (i.e. electrical, mechanical, building, etc.). The permit costs will be borne by the Contractor.

2.10 DISPUTED WORK.

2.10.1 Retention of Imperfect Work. If any portion of the work done or materials furnished under the contract proves defective or not in accordance with the specifications and contract drawings, and if the imperfection in the same is not of sufficient magnitude or importance to make the work dangerous or undesirable, or if the removal of such work is impracticable or will create conditions which are dangerous or undesirable in the opinion of the Engineer, the Engineer shall have the right and authority to retain the work instead of requiring it to be removed and reconstructed, but he shall make deductions therefor in the payment of the contract item due Contractor as may be just and reasonable.

2-11. DISPUTE RESOLUTION.

2-11.1 Requests for Contract Adjustments and Relief . If either Contractor or the Agency believes that it is entitled to relief against the other for any event arising out of or related to the work or Project, such party shall provide written notice to the other party of the basis for its claim for relief. Such notice shall, if possible, be made prior to incurring any cost or expense and in accordance with any specific notice requirements contained in the applicable sections of this Contract.

In the absence of any specific notice requirement, written notice shall be given within a reasonable time, not to exceed fourteen (14) days, after the occurrence giving rise to the claim for relief or after the claiming party reasonably should have recognized the event or condition giving rise to the request, whichever is later. Such notice shall include sufficient information to advise the other party of the circumstances giving rise to the claim for relief, the specific contractual adjustment or relief requested and the basis of such request.

2-11.2 Dispute Avoidance and Resolution . The parties are fully committed to working with each other throughout the Project and agree to communicate regularly with each other at all times so as to avoid or minimize disputes or disagreements. If disputes or disagreements do arise, Contractor and the Agency each commit to resolving such disputes or disagreements in an amicable, professional and expeditious manner so as to avoid unnecessary losses, delays and disruptions to the work under the Contract.

Contractor and the Agency will first attempt to resolve disputes or disagreements at the field level through discussions between Contractor’s Representative and the Engineer.

If a dispute or disagreement cannot be resolved through the Contractor’s Representative and the Engineer, Contractor’s Chief Executive Officer or similar senior representative and the Gardena City Manager, or designee, upon the request of the other party, shall meet as soon as conveniently possible, but in no case later than twenty (20) days after such a request is made, to attempt to resolve such dispute or disagreement. Prior to any meeting between the parties’ senior representatives, the parties will ex change relevant information that will assist the parties GP-6
in resolving their dispute or disagreement.

If, after meeting, the senior representatives determine that the dispute or disagreement cannot be resolved on terms satisfactory to both parties, the parties may submit the dispute to binding or non-binding mediation. The mediation shall be conducted in any manner and by any person or mediation association mutually acceptable to the parties.

2-11.3 Arbitration. Any claims, disputes or controversies between the parties arising out of or relating to the Contract, or the breach thereof, which have not been resolved in accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 2 -11.2 above may be decided by binding or non- binding arbitration. The arbitration shall be conducted in any manner and by any person or arbitration association mutually acceptable to the parties.

2-11.4 Claims Disputes. Any claims of Contractor, as “claims” are defined in California Public Contract Code Section 9204 shall be processed in accordance with that section. Section 9204 provides in relevant part that upon receiving a claim from a contractor, together with reasonable documentation to support the claim, a contracting public entity shall conduct a reasonable review of the claim and, within a period not to exceed 45 days [except as otherwise provided in Section 9204], shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying what portion of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed.

Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. If the public entity fails to issue a written statement, Section 2-11.3 shall apply. If the contractor disputes the public entity’s written response, or if the public entity fails to respond to a claim within the time prescribed, the contractor may demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute.

Upon receipt of a demand in writing sent by registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion of the claim remains in dispute, the public entity shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying the portion of the claim that remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed.

Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim of the claim, as identified by the contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the public entity and the contractor sharing the associated costs equally. The public entity and contractor shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days after the disputed portion of the claim has been identified in writing. If the parties cannot agree upon a mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each party shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the selection of the neutral mediator.

If mediation is unsuccessful, the parts of the claim remaining in dispute shall be subject to other applicable procedures.

2-13 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS (“RECORD” DRAWINGS). At all times, the Contractor shall maintain at the project a “Record” set of Drawings and Specifications to include all executed addenda, change orders, and field orders.

Prior to each progress payment the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer, a set of contract drawings with all applicable “as constructed” notes placed/recorded thereon. Failure to provide “as constructed” plans will cause progress payment to be withheld until information is provided to City.

GP-7

After completion of the work and before final payment, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a complete set of contract drawings with all applicable “as constructed” noted placed/record thereon. The final form and detail of these as constructed plans are subject to the acceptance of the Engineer.

2-14 MARKING REMOVAL. All markings placed by the Contractor, City, and Underground Service Alert (USA) during construction shall be removed at the completion of the work. These markings shall include, but not limited to, paint, stakes, and metal tags.

All cost associated with removal of markings shall be included in the bid prices for the applicable bid items. Failure of the Contractor to remove these markings shall be cause for the City to do the work and withhold the costs from the Contractor’s final payment.

SECTION 3 – CONTROL OF THE WORK

3-5 INSPECTION. Inspection shall be made once a day for areas ready for inspection. Areas or items that fail inspection or that are not ready for inspection shall be rescheduled by the contractor.

Inspection of the work shall not relieve the contractor of the obligation to fulfill all conditions and requirements of the contract.

3-6 THE CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIVE. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the name, address and cell/ business/home telephone numbers of the person responsible for the maintenance of barricades, traffic control signs, lights and other safety devices.

3-10 SURVEYING.

3-10.3 Line and Grade. Unless otherwise provided in the Technical Provisions, establishing lines and grades for construction shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, with the following provisions:

All work under this contract shall be built in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the plans. Field survey for establishing these, and for the control of construction, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All such surveys, including construction staking, shall be performed on all items ordinarily requiring grade and alignment, at intervals normally accepted by the agencies and trade involved.

The Contractor shall provide a copy of the office calculations and grade sheets to the Agency’s Inspector. The Contractor shall be responsible for any error in the finished work, and shall notify the Engineer within 24 hours of any discrepancies or design errors discovered during staking.

Unless a separate bid item is provided, the payment for surveying, construction staking, professional services, office calculations, furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals, and for doing all work involved shall be considered as included in the various items of work, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor.

3-10.4 Permanent Survey Markers. The Contractor is required to locate and tie out survey monuments in the project area prior to construction involving street and highways, or City public right of way and to file with the County Surveyor a Corner Record of any such work. Prior to final payment and the issuance of a completion certificate, the Contractor is required to file a Corner Record for survey monumentation that is replaced. All such survey work shall be performed under the supervision of a California licensed Land Surveyor or a Civil Engineer GP-8
authorized to perform such work.

The Contractor shall provide the Agency a copy of the office calculations and documents submitted to the County for filing in connection with the aforementioned work.

The payment for surveying, related professional services, office calculation, furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, tools and incidentals, and for doing all work involved shall be considered as included in the various items of work, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefor.

3-12 WORK SITE MAINTENANCE.

3-12.1 General. The Contractor shall keep the work site clean and free from rubbish and debris.

The Contractor shall abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping and sprinkling with water in keeping with the AQMD and NPDES requirements. Debris, soil or other matter shall not be washed into storm drains but shall be collected and disposed of in a legal, responsible manner.

The construction area shall be cleaned with a power sweeper at the end of every workday and when deemed necessary by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall maintain drainage within and through the work areas. Earth dams will not be permitted in paved areas. Use temporary sandbags to control the site perimeter. At the completion of the project sandbags shall become the property of the City of Gardena and shall be remain in place.

The Contractor shall not spill on haul routes. Any such spillage shall be removed immediately and the area cleaned.

Stockpiling of construction materials or debris on City right -of-way shall be in accordance with the NPDES permit and shall be approved by the inspector. At the completion of work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all work areas.

3-12.2 Air Pollution and Surface Maintenance Control . The Contractor shall obtain a construction water meter from Golden State Water including required deposit and fees. The Contractor shall pay for the water used, at the current water rates. All arrangements for construction water shall be made by contractor with Golden State Water at Contractor expense.

3-12.4. Storage of Equipment and Material.

3-12.4.1 General. All costs associated with the disposal of all excavated or demolition materials, including any gate fees, shall be paid by the Contractor. These costs shall be included in the bid price for the applicable bid items.

Prior to any excavated or demolition material being removed from the construction site the Contractor shall notify the City as to the hauling route and destination for disposal. If the location for disposal is other than a county landfill then the Contractor shall provide the City with written permission and release of liability for the City from the owner of the property where the material will be deposited.

The City has an exclusive agreement with Waste Resources, Inc. and no other firm may provide bulk trash bins in the event the work requires this service.

3-12.4.2 Storage in Public Streets. Construction equipment shall not be stored at the construction site, any public street or publicly owned facilities without approval of the City.

Contractor shall store equipment at a contractor’s rental yard.

GP-9
All excavated material that is to be hauled to and disposed of at a County landfill site by the Contractor is subject to a County gate fee based on tonnage.

3-12.5.4 Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements. Any facilities, structures, water lines, landscaping, surfaces, signs, pavement markings, painted curbs, house numbers, etc., which are damaged during construction shall be restored to the satisfaction of the City. Damaged water lines shall be repaired immediately at no additional cost to the city.

3-12.5.5 Access to Private Property. The Contractor shall be aware that business and residential access must be maintained at all times. The Contractor shall schedule operations to minimize interference with access to private property.

The main access way to any business or home shall not be completely blocked for more than one four-hour period a day except blockage shall be limited to one twenty -four (24) hour period when concrete is poured.

Temporary access ways shall be provided from the street to the main access way of all businesses and homes by use of traffic rated steel plates or any other method approved by the city.

Payment for this item shall be included in the applicable contract work item.

3-13 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND WARRANTY.

3-13.3 Warranty. In addition to the guarantees as required in Section 1 -7.2 and 3 -13.3 of the Standard Specifications, the Faithful Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect for a period of one year after acceptance of the work by the Agency to insure that defects, which may appear within said period, will be repaired, replaced, or corrected by the Contractor, at his own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer within thirty (30) days after written notice thereof by the Agency.

SECTION 4 – CONTROL OF MATERIAL

4-1 GENERAL.

4-1.1 Warranty of Title. No materials, supplies or equipment for the work under this Contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest therein or any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier.

The Contractor warrants clear and good title to all materials, supplies and equipment installed and incorporated in the work, and agrees upon completion of all work to deliver the premises, together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the Agency free from any claims, liens, encumbrances or charges, and further agrees that neither he nor any person, firm or corporation furnishing any material or labor for work covered by the Contract shall have any right to a lien upon the premises or any improvement or appurtenance thereon; provided, that this shall not preclude the Contractor from installing metering devices or other equipment of utility companies the title of which is commonly retained by the utility company. Nothing contained in this section, however, shall defeat or impair the right of such persons furnishing materials or labor under any bond given by the Contractor for their protection, or any right under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the Contractor, which are in the hands of the Agency.

The provisions of this section shall be inserted in all subcontractor’s and material contracts, and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no GP-10
formal contract is entered into regarding such materials.

SECTION 5 – LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBLITIES

5-3 LABOR.

5-3.3 Payroll Records. The Contractor will be required to submit weekly -certified payrolls for the project. The Contractor shall also submit payrolls for all subcontractors. These payrolls shall be submitted to the Engineer on a weekly basis. The Contractor shall also maintain separate records for three years after the project is completed. In the event a legal request is made for a redacted copy of these payroll records, the Contractor shall provide same within three working days of receipt of this demand.

Submitting certified payrolls to other agencies (Union, Prime Contractor, Labor Compliance Program, and Department of Industrial Relations) does not fulfill the requirement to submit certified payroll records to the City.

5-4 INSURANCE. In lieu of Section 5 -4 of the Standard Specifications, r efer to the City Contract Documents Section, CD-10, for detail requirements.

5-5 ANTITRUST CLAIMS. By entry into this Contract, Contractor hereby acknowledges the terms of Section 7103.5 of the Public Contract Code and hereby offers and agrees to assign to the Agency all rights, title and interest in all causes of action it may have as outlined above.

5-7 SAFETY.

5-7.4 Hazardous Substances. As required by Public Contract Code Section 7104, if this Contract involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four (4) feet below the surface, Contractor shall promptly, and prior to disturbance of any conditions, notify the Agency of: (1) any material discovered in excavation that Contractor believes to be a hazardous waste that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II or Class III disposal site; (2) subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated by the Agency; and (3) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature at the site, significantly different from those ordinarily encountered in such contract work. Upon notification, the Agency shall promptly investigate the conditions to determine whether a change order is appropriate. In the event of a dispute, Contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date and shall proceed with all work to be performed under the Contract but shall retain all rights provided by the Contract and by law for making protests and resolving the dispute.

5-7.4.1 Edison Energized Conductors. Contractor hereby promises and agrees that in the performance of the work specified in this Contract, it will employ and utilized only qualified persons, as hereinafter defined, to work in proximity to Edison’s secondary, primary and transmission facilities. The term “qualified person” is defined in Title 8, California Administrative Code, Section 2700, as follows:

“Qualified Person: A person who by reason of experience or instruction is familiar with the operation to be performed and the hazards involved.”

Contractor further promises and agrees that the provisions of this section shall be and are binding upon any subcontractor or subcontractors that may be retained by it, and that Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to assure compliance by said subcontractor or subcontractors with the requirements of this section.

GP-11
5-7.4.2 Emergency Provisions. Unusual conditions may arise on the work which will require that immediate and unusual provision be made to protect the public from danger or loss or damage to life and property, due directly or indirectly to the prosecution of the work, and it is part of the service required of the Contractor to make such provisions and to furnish such protection.

Whenever, in the opinion of the Agency, an emergency exists of which the Agency is aware and against which the Contractor has not taken sufficient precaution for the safety of the public or the protection of utilities or of adjacent structures or property which may be injured by the progress of construction; and whenever, in the opinion of the Agency, immediate action shall be considered necessary in order to protect public or private personnel or property interests, or prevent likely loss of human life or damage on account of the operations under the Contract, then in that event the Agency may provide suitable protection to said interests by causing such work to be done and material to be furnished, as in the opinion of the Agency may seem reasonable and necessary, all at the expense of the Contractor.

SECTION 6 – PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK

6-1.1 Construction Schedule. The Contractor’s proposed construction schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer within fourteen (14 ) calendar days after the date of the contract execution. The schedule shall be supported by written statements from each supplier of materials or equipment indicating that all orders have been placed and acknowledged and setting forth the dates that each item will be delivered.

The Contractor shall include in his bid all costs to perform the work under this contract in stages.

The Contractor shall begin and complete work in each stage prior to starting work in subsequent stages unless previous permission is obtained from the Engineer. The contractor shall stage the work to allow parking on the next adjacent streets. Restricting parking on multiple adjoining streets shall require approval of the engineer.

6-1.2 Commencement of the Work. City may establish a Notice to Proceed (NTP) date no later than thirty (30) calendar days after the date of the contract execution. Prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed, the Engineer will schedule a preconstruction meeting with the Contractor to review the proposed construction schedule and delivery dates, arrange utility coordination, discuss construction methods and clarify inspection procedures.

The names, addresses and telephone numbers of the Contractor and subcontractors, or their representatives, shall be filed with the Public Works Manager and the County Sheriff’s Department or the City Police Department prior to beginning work.

The Contractor shall also notify the City of Gardena and the owners of all utilities and substructures within the Project area not less than 48 hours prior to starting construction. The following utility companies list of names and telephone numbers is intended for the convenience of the contractor and is not guaranteed to be complete or correct:

GP-12
COMPANY CONTACT TELEPHONE NO.

Southern California Edison Manuel Vargas, Jr. 310.783.9389 Southern California Gas Melissa Fukunaga: Tech Services Planning: Attn - Lead Planner
213.231.7281
AT&T Marco A. Perez 626.491.5503
Raymond Dover 310.515.4257
Gardena Police Dispatch 310.3237911
L.A. County Fire Dept. 310.323.7911
Time Warner
Communications Arturo Fernandez 310.750.9099
Crown Castle Hector Aguilera 951.454.5111
Waste Resources of Gardena Lorena Rodriguez 310.366.7600 Golden State Water Co. Justin Doronio 310.436.6950 x111 Joseph Salcido 310.660.0320 x101
L.A. County Flood Control Daryll Chenoweth 626.458.3129 L.A. Sanitation District Jon Ganz 562.908.4288
Metropolitan Water District Civil Eng. Substructures Section 213.217.7059 Chevron Pipeline Dave Zerler 310.669.4014
Underground Service Alert 800.422.4133

The Contractor shall submit periodic Progress reports to the Engineer by the tenth day of each month. The report shall include an updated Construction Schedule. Any deviations from the original schedule shall be explained. Progress payments will be withheld pending receipt of any outstanding reports.

6-1.3 Working Day. The Contractor’s working hours shall be limited to the hours between 8 A.M. and 4:30 P.M., Monday through Friday except holidays. No work which will cause loud or disruptive noise and “No Parking” enforcement shall begin prior to 8:00 a.m. nor terminate later than 4:30 p.m. Deviation from normal working hours will not be allowed unless written permission has been duly obtained beforehand from the office of the City Engineer. The Contractor shall provide adequate light for proper prosecution of the work, for the safety of the workmen and the public, and for proper inspection.

If the Contractor works beyond the allowed normal working hours without prior written approval from the Engineer, the Contractor may be charged Five Hundred ($500) for each occurrence as required by the Engineer. The amount will be deducted from a progress payment or bond.

Contractor hereby acknowledges and shall be required to comply with the provisions of California Labor Code Section 1810 et seq. According to those sections, eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a legal day’s work. Contractor shall pay to the Agency a penalty of Twenty -Five Dollars ($25.00) for each worker employed in the execution of this Contract by Contractor, or by any Subcontractor, for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any calendar day or forty (40) hours in any one (1) calendar week, except when payment for overtime is made at not less than one and one- half (1- 1/2) times the basic rate for that worker.

In the event of either a requested or emergency deviation, inspection service fees will be charged against the Contractor. The service fees will be calculated at overtime rates including GP-13
benefits, overhead and travel time. The service fees will be deducted from any amounts due to the Contractor.

6-1.4 Notice and Service Thereof . Any notice required or given by one party to the other under the contract shall be in writing and shall be dated and signed by the party giving such notice or by a duly authorized representative of such party. Any such notice shall not be effective for any purpose whatever unless served in the following manner:

Notice shall be given to the Agency by personal delivery thereof to the City of Gardena Engineer or by depositing the same in the United States mail enclosed in a sealed envelope, registered and with postage prepaid, addressed to:

Public Works Department
City of Gardena
1717 W. 162
nd Street
Gardena, CA 90247-3778

Notice shall be given to the Contractor by personal delivery thereof to said Contractor or to his authorized representative at the site of the project, or by depositing the same in the United States mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to said Contractor at the address established for the conduct of the work under this Contract, postage prepaid and registered.

Notice shall be given to the Surety, or any other person, by personal delivery to said Surety or other person, or by depositing the same in the United States Mail, enclosed in a sealed envelope addressed to such Surety or persons at the address of said Surety or persons last communicated to the party giving the notice, postage prepaid and registered.

Notification of Property Owners and Tenants - The Contractor shall notify each property owner and/or tenant in the project area in writing five (5) working days prior to the start of construction.

If pedestrian or vehicular access to private property is to be blocked, the Contractor shall again notify each property owner and/or tenant in writing five (5) working days prior to construction activities. The Contractor shall provide additional notices when a lapse time occurs during each phase/segment work.

The written notice shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to being delivered.

6-2 PROSECUTION OF THE WORK.

6-2.1 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work. Until the formal acceptance of the work by the Agency, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall, subject to the insurance protection furnished in accordance with the Section 1-7.6 and 5 -4 hereof, bear the risk of accident, loss or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non- execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and otherwise correct damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before its acceptance.

In case of suspension of work from any cause what soever, the Contractor shall be responsible for all materials and the proper temporary storage thereof.

6-3 TIME OF COMPLETION.

6-3.1 General. The contract time shall begin per the City’s written notification. Work must be completed within working days specified for the project. In addition, the Contractor shall notify the City 24 hours in advance of the actual commencement of work.

GP-14

No work shall be undertaken during the City’s holiday closures. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to determine the City’s closure dates.

6-9 LIQUDATED DAMAGES. The amount of liquidated damages is hereby amended to $1,000 for each consecutive calendar day.

SECTION 7 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

7-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK.

7-1.2 Method of Measure. The quantities shown on the Bid Schedule are approximate only. The Contractor will be paid for the actual quantities of work based on approved field measurements as provided for in these Specifications. The City reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of any item or portion of work to be performed or materials furnished, or to delete any item, in accordance with the Specifications. Additional bid item work shall be completed within the total working days in these specifications. Additional working days maybe allowed with the approval of the engineer.

7-3 PAYMENT.

7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment . The Engineer will authorize monthly partial /progress payments per Section 7 -3.2 of the Standard Specifications. Contractor’s monthly invoice shall be submitted on company letterhead. Each invoice submitted shall include: project name, date of invoice, progress payment number, and purchase order number. All bid items shall be included on each invoice and include unit, unit price bid, original quantity, amount, previous payment quantity and amount, current invoice payment quantity and amount, total project payment quantity and amount. In addition, any approved change orders shall be listed on invoice. Payment to Contractor typically takes 30 days from submittal of approved invoice.

However, payments will be withheld pending receipt of any outstanding reports required by the Contract Documents.

7-3.3 Delivered Materials . The City will NOT honor or make any progress payments for materials ordered and delivered to the job site by the Contractor unless prior approval is obtained from the Engineer.

7-4 PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK.

7-4.3 EXTRA WORK. When work is performed on a "time and materials" basis, the following percentages shall be added to the Contractor's cost and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits:

1) Labor ......................................................... 20 2) Materials ......................................................... 15 3) Equipment Rental ....................................................... 15 4) Other Items and Expenditures .................................... 15

To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, 1 percent shall be added as compensation for bonding.

When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcontractor, the markup established above shall be applied to the Subcontractor's actual cost of such work. A markup of 10 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work GP-15
added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor.

SECTION 8 – FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL

8-2 FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES. The Contractor shall provide the class of field office indicated below:

Class "A" Class "B" Class "C"

In the event none of the boxes are marked above, no specific field office will be required, and the use therefor of any field office will be at the Contractor's discretion. The location of any field office shall be as provided on the plans, in these Specifications or as designated by the Engineer.

END OF GENERAL PROVISIONS

TP-1

GREENBOOK TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

CITY HALL AND P.D. ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS UPGRADE (1700 W. 162nd Street)
JN 541

PART 1 – TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

SECTION 1 – GENERAL
PREFACE: All work and materials shall conform to the "Standard Specification for Public Works Construction", 2021 edition, except as modified by the contract and these Technical Provisions.

Incidental Work - All work and materials required by the plans and specifications, and not specifically listed in the bid schedule items of work, shall be considered incidental and no additional payment shall be made therefore. Incidental items shall include, but are not limited to, mobilization; implementation of the SWPPP and Best Management Practices for the protection of storm drain structures; adjusting utility access covers to grade; saw cutting; excavation and disposal of materials; survey; traffic control and coordination of utilities.

Working hours - Normal working hour s are M -F, 8AM to 4:30PM except City holidays. All other work outside of these hours will require written approval from the City.

Work outside of normal working hours: (Work requiring power outage)

“Cut-over” connection work to replace existing Police Dept. feeders with new utility power feed must be done outside of City Hall operating hours and/or on weekends, for example starting 5PM Friday through 6AM Monday. City Hall must have full power available during their normal hours of Monday – Thursday: 7:30AM to 5:30PM; Friday: 7:30AM to 4:30PM.

Interior panel/subpanel work such as replacing Zinsco panels must be done outside of City Hall operating hours, and could be done 6PM to 11PM M-F, or 8AM to 4:30PM Sat. or Sun.

The Police Dept. power cannot ever be shut off and must remain continuous.

The City Hall IT/Server room has a small UPS system that operates for a maximum of 40- minutes. Contractor must provide continuous electric power to the City Hall IT/Server room using either a batter/inverted system or a small portable generator.

City Hall shall have full power during all business hours.

All requests for City Hall power outages shall require two weeks advance notice and shall be approved by the City prior to being scheduled.

If power is not restored by the end of a City approved power outage, the contractor shall be charged two hundred fifty ($250) dollars per minute until full power is restored to all areas as required by the City Engineer.

Deferred Submittals

Contactor is required to pull a permit with the City of Gardena Community Development Department (CDD). The Plans have been partially approved. Contactor shall develop and TP-2

submit to CDD “deferred submittals” in order to secure a fully approved construction plan and be issued a permit. Below are some, but not limited to, the required deferred submittals.

1. Provide a panel schedule with dimensions and show on schedule the size of each panel to be replaced with new to verify that each new panel will fit in the space of the panel to be replaced. If not provide construction details for enlargement and repair of wall cavity to accommodate the replacement panels.

2. Provide a survey of the project site to locate each equipment using available monuments, and exact location of enclosure walls and foundations.

3. Provide architectural plans to show material, color and texture of enclosure wall to match existing similar enclosures and to match City Hall, for planning review.

4. Provide structural calculations for foundation of the enclosure structure, and provide structural calculations for wind design, show door into enclosure and a secondary emergency exit. Show hardware complying with hazardous locations.

5. Provide structural plans and calculations for foundations of each equipment located in the generator enclosure, all equipment that are part of the Emergency Generator will need to be anchored to the foundations and foundation and anchorage are to be designed using a seismic importance factor of 1.5 for essential service equipment.

PART 2 – CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS

SECTION 200 – ROCK MATREIALS

200-2. UNTREATED BASE MATERIAL

200-2.1 General. The Contractor shall furnish Certified Weight Tickets for material delivered to the job site and deliver it to the Engineer or his representative before the end of the working day.

The City may hire a qualified soils engineer to perform all tests. If the material furnished by the Contractor fails any tests, the Contractor shall remove said material and shall complete the construction of the base with material acceptable to the Engineer at no extra cost to the City.

Costs for base material shall be incidental and included in the bid item of work for which it is required, and no additional payment will be allowed therefore.

SECTION 201 – CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS

201-1 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE.

201-1.1.2 Concrete Specified by Class and Alternate Class. Concrete shall be 520- C-2500 for curb -gutter, curb ramps, driveways, sidewalk and concrete pavement. Curing compound shall be Type 2 (if required).

SECTION 203 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

TP-3

203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE.

203-6.4.1 Class and Grade. Asphalt hot mix shall be C2-PG64-10 for capping or finish course.

Feather join edges shall be made along straight lines by hand raking out all heavy aggregates prior to rolling to produce a smooth uniform surface. Compacted edge along gutter lip shall be 3/8 inch in height.

PART 3 – CONSTRUCTION METHODS

SECTION 300 - EARTHWORK

300-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING.

In addition to the work outlined in Section 300- 1, the following items of work are included under "Clear and Grub":

A. Providing clean topsoil and grading of parkways as directed by the Engineer to restore the parkway grades.

B. Replacement of damaged pipe curb drain, as well as the coring and/or reinstatement of pipe curb drains.

C. Protection or replacement of brick banding on driveway.

D. Protection of fences adjacent to and within the public right-of-way.

E. Relocation of existing signs and warning devices (City shall provide new poles as required.)
F. Painting new and repainting existing curb markings such as yellow, blue, white, green or red curb as well as curb addresses
G. Protect existing private/public irrigation systems, and repair irrigation systems damaged during construction.

H. Protection of all existing improvements (public or private), unless shown to be removed/relocated/adjusted as part of the construction. The Contractor shall repair or replace these items if damaged with new materials equal to the original or better, as required by the Engineer.

I. Protection of all utilities, walls, fences, hedges, buildings, concrete slabs, planters, and other private or public improvements not specifically shown to be removed as part of the construction. The Contractor shall replace these items, if damaged, with new material equal to the original or better, as required by the Engineer.

J. All complaints/claims resulting from reconstruction of concrete improvements will be forwarded to the Contractor. The complaint/claim will be fully rectified or the City will repair the item and deduct that amount from progress payment.

300-1.1.a General.

All existing improvements, including those on private property, shall be protected in place. Any damage to and removal of these improvements shall be repaired and replaced by the Contractor at his expense.

All excavated material shall be immediately hauled away and disposed of outside the project limits. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages and claims that may arise as a result of this disposal.

TP-4

300-12 EXCAVATION. Roadway excavation shall include sawcutting, excavating, removing, hauling, and disposing of all soil materials, existing asphaltic concrete pavement, PCC pavement, subgrade and similar appurtenances which are to be removed for construction of the street reconstruction as shown on the Plans. Earthwork, subgrade preparation and finishing roadway shall confirm to the applicable requirements of Section 300 and 301 and other pertinent sections of the Standard Specifications for the various items involved. P ayment for excavation shall be incidental and included in the appropriate unit price bid.

300-12.1 Asphalt Pavement Removal. The edges of asphalt pavement remaining in place shall be sawcut and shall have clean, solid vertical faces. The edges of asphalt pavement broken during construction shall be resawn and removed before surfacing material is placed at the expense of the Contractor.

All edges shall be parallel or perpendicular to curb faces except cuts around objects shall be on a curvilinear cut, a maximum 4 inches departure from the straight cut every 2 feet.

300-12.2 Concrete Removal. Concrete to be removed shall be sawcut to a minimum depth of 5 inches at score marks or as marked by the City. Sawed edges, broken or chipped during construction shall be resawn at the contractor's expense. Increase in concrete quantity due to resawing shall not be considered for payment. Upon concrete removal, the City Parks Superintendent shall be informed to check and approve all roots to be removed. If he determines the tree cannot be saved, removal and planting of a new tree shall be per unit cost.

All edges shall be parallel or perpendicular to curb faces except cuts around objects shall be on a curvilinear cut, a maximum of 4 inches departure from the straight cut within every 2 feet. The edges of Portland cement concrete remaining in place shall be sawcut and shall have clean, solid vertical faces.

The Contractor is responsible for inspecting each location prior to submitting a bid.

Excavation in the street section adjacent to concrete replacement shall be a minimum width of 1-foot and a minimum depth of 6-inches or 1-inch greater than the existing AC section if greater than 6-inches in depth.

Remove and replace defective concrete work with new materials. Permission to patch any defective areas shall not be a waiver of the Engineer's right to require complete removal of defective work if patching does not restore quality and appearance of work.

The Contractor may stockpile sand or clean fill dirt within the street, except arterial streets, between the curb and 8 -feet out, for no longer than 72 hours in any one location with prior approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the fronting residence 24 hours prior to stockpiling any material. Said stockpile shall not block the flow line of the gutter and shall be barricaded with flasher-equipped barriers. The Contractor shall ensure that the street is swept clean upon vacating the stockpile site. No excavated or removed dirt or concrete may be stockpiled in any street overnight.

The Contractor shall remove all debris and perform all cleanup work to the satisfaction of the Engineer within 3 working days after forms have been removed at any location.

TP-5

Concrete removed shall be replaced within five (5) days after removal. All restorations shall be completed a maximum of five (5) days after concrete placement (i.e. backfill, grading of dirt, asphalt repave etc.) One Hundred ($100) dollars per calendar day and location shall be charged to the Contractor for failure to comply with the above schedule as required by the Engineer.

SECTION 302 – ROADWAY/PARKING LOT SURFACING

302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE (AC) PAVEMENT.

302-5.1 General. The Contractor shall establish designated asphalt truck routes and staging areas and shall communicate these routes and areas to truck drivers prior to the arrival at the job site.

This plan must be approved by the Engineer five (5) days prior to paving.

302-5.3 Prime Coat. Prime coat shall be applied to all subgrade surfaces prior to asphalt hot mix surfacing. The prime coat shall be Grade SC -250 liquid asphalt uniformity per Green Book requirements.

302-5.4 Tack Coat. Asphalt tack coat shall be applied to all existing asphalt surfaces prior to asphalt overlay.

Existing surfaces shall be cleaned utilizing a power sweeper and free of water prior to applying PG 64-10 or SS-1h asphalt tack coat per Green Book requirements. Tack coat shall uniformly cover all areas to be paved.

302-5.5 Distribution and Spreading.

BOTTOM DUMPING OF ASPHALT PAVING SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED.

302.5.6.2 Density and Smoothness. Failed areas shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense.

302-5.7 Joints. COLD JOINTS SHALL NOT BE ALLOWED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER. COLD JOINTS PLACED WITHOUT APPROVAL SHALL BE REMOVED AT THE SOLE EXPENSE OF THE CONTRACTOR.

SECTION 314 – TRAFFIC STRIPING, CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS,

AND PAVEMENT MARKERS

314-1 GENERAL. Furnishing and installation of traffic markings shall include all work required to place raised pavement markers, thermoplastic material and curb paint. Legends and crosswalks shall consist of thermoplastic material with glass bead finish.

Striping work and materials shall conform to the provisions of the Standard Specifications of the State of California, Department of Transportation, latest edition, and the Traffic Manual of the State of California, Department of Transportation. Installation of traffic markings shall be completed within 5 working days of paving.

314-4 APPLICATION OF TRAFFIC STRIPING AND CURB AND PAVEMENT MARKING.

TP-6

314-4.1 GENERAL. Each fire hydrant in the project area shall be marked by placing a double- sided raised pavement marker with reflective blue markings on each side. The marker and adhesive shall be equivalent to Caltrans pavement markers.

Place one marker 6 inches from street centerline toward hydrant on a line projected approximately perpendicular to curb. Place two markers if hydrant is on a corner, one on each street.

PART 4 – EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS

SECTION 400 – PROTECTION AND RESTORATION

400-2 PERMANENT SURVEY MARKERS. The Contractor shall provide all surveying to complete the project and to replace any damaged monuments, benchmarks, ties, etc. All survey work shall be performed by a Land Surveyor registered by the State of California. Work shall be laid out and constructed so as to provide smooth profiles to adjacent improvements and drainage of all surfaces.

PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION, the Surveyor shall locate and provide ties for all existing centerline monuments and centerline ties. The Surveyor shall file a corner record of these monuments and ties with the County Surveyor. A copy of these corner records shall be given to the Engineer prior to start of construction.

AFTER CONSTRUCTION, all existing survey monuments and ties lost due to construction shall be reestablished by the Surveyor.

SECTION 401 - REMOVAL

401-3.1 CONCRETE AND MASONRY IMPROVEMENTS.

401-3.2 Concrete Curb, Walk, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Curb Ramps, Driveway, and Alley Intersections.

Concrete sidewalk construction shall include removal and disposal of existing interfering structures, tree roots, objects, soil, etc. Contractor shall remove and replace any inadequate existing base material with compacted CMB.

Any damaged utility boxes, traffic signal pull boxes, etc., shall be replaced. All boxes shall be adjusted to grade and all costs for this work shall be incidental and included in this item of work.

Concrete curb and gutter construction shall include removal and disposal of existing interfering structures, objects, soil, etc.

Curb & gutter to be replaced shall be installed at the same location as the existing on a straight grade across the limits of the replacement.

Removal, disposal and construction of adjacent 2 -feet wide asphalt hot mix paving (C2 PG64 - 10) over 6-inch thick C.A.B. shall be included.

The Contractor shall regrade the area at the back of curb/gutter where the new curb/gutter is constructed at a different grade than existing curb/gutter. The graded area shall have a TP-7

maximum slope of 3:1 and 2% in city parkways. Fill material, if required, for this grading shall be furnished by the Contractor. All landscaping and irrigation in the graded area shall be repaired

Curb Ramp construction shall include removal and disposal of interfering structures, objects and soil. Ramp shall be 4" thick concrete over 6" thick C.A.B.

Included in this construction is the adjustment and protection of sweeps, conduits, pull boxes, utility access frames and covers to finished grade and protection of traffic detectors, stub- outs and homeruns. Traffic detectors damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.

At locations where street lighting or traffic signal poles encroach into the curb ramp to be installed, concrete pedestals shall be constructed between finished grade and pole bases.

Removal, disposal and construction of adjacent curb & gutter, spandrel, cross gutter, and 24 in. wide hot mix asphalt paving (C2 PG64-10) over 6 in. thick C.A.B. shall be included. Ramp shall be poured separately from curb and gutter (min. 24hrs after curb and gutter).

The Contractor shall verify, with a “smart level”, that maximum ramp and sidewalk grades do not exceed maximum grades indicated on the project plans, when marking the required saw cut removal limits and when setting the concrete forms, prior to pouring any curb access ramp locations. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to supervise and utilize the proper experienced personnel to ensure that the proper saw cut limits are established for all access ramp locations and the Engineer shall not be responsible to direct the Contractor’s crews or otherwise serve in this management capacity.

The Contractor shall be responsible to layout the proposed access ramp to comply with the maximum grades indicated on the project plans. Typical construction tolerances to construct the new access ramp shall not apply and maximum grades indicated on the project plans shall not be exceeded. The Contractor shall be responsible to remove and reconstruct access ramps at his own cost if ramps are deemed non -compliant with the project plans and these Technical Provisions.

Where the type of access ramp includes a retaining curb at the back of access ramp to make up for a difference in elevation between the existing grade and access ramp grade, the construction of said retaining curb shall be considered as part of the access ramp work.

The access ramp construction work shall include all related adjustments of pull boxes, pull box covers, and protection of traffic signal poles and signs that fall within the proposed access ramp construction limits.

Pavers or Brickwork . At the locations where pavers or brickwork exist, no additional compensation will be made for reinstallation. Should pavers or brickwork be damaged during removal, the replacement shall match existing.

The Contractor shall regrade the area at the back of sidewalk where the new sidewalk is constructed at a different grade than existing sidewalk. The graded area shall have a maximum slope of 3:1 and 2% in City parkways. Fill material, if required, for this grading shall be furnished by the Contractor. All landscaping and irrigation in the graded area shall be repaired .

All existing asphalt concrete ramping adjacent to the new sidewalk shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor.

TP-8

SECTION 402 – UTILITES

402-2 PROTECTION. The Contractor shall provide coordination with all utility companies involved and shall provide protection from damage to their facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for repair or replacement to said facilities made necessary by its failure to provide required protection.

The Contractor shall be solely responsible to check all utility record maps, books, and/or other data in the possession of the CITY, other agencies, and/or all utility companies, and no allowance shall be made for any failure to have done so.

The Contractor shall utilize the services of “Underground Service Alert -Southern California” for utility locating in all public right-of-ways by calling 811 or 1-800-227-2600 at least 48 hours prior to any excavation.

Underground lines that are potentially hazardous such as oil company lines, natural gas mains, and electrical conduits will be carefully located by the owner as provided in the Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall take special precautions in determining the precise location and depth of these structures and coordinate work with the utility to ensure that they will not be damaged by its operations.

PART 6 - TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL

SECTION 600 - ACCESS

600-1 GENERAL.

600-1.1 Public Convenience and Safety Access. The Contractor shall provide temporary “No Parking” and all other signs which are necessary for the safe and orderly conduct of vehicular traffic as directed by the Engineer and as specified herein. Contractor shall also provide an approval barricaded area in the parking lane for pedestrian traffic during such time as the parkway is unfit to be used for pedestrian traffic.

At such times as driveways are inaccessible due to the Contractor’s work, they shall be blocked by two (2) Class II barricades or one (1) Class II barricade and two (2) delineators. Driveways that are ramped or planked for temporary access shall be provided with a barricade or delineator at each side. The Contractor shall give 24 -hour notice to affected property owners prior to blocking any driveway.

The Contractor shall provide access for refuse collection on the regularly scheduled days. He shall also facilitate or assist in the collection where such work is hampered by his operations.

600-1.2 Street Closures, Detours, and Barricades. The Contractor shall not close any street within the City of Gardena without first obtaining the approval of the Engineer. Barricading, traffic control and detour diagrams in connection with street closures shall be submitted by the contractor as required by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide and install barricades, delineators, warning devices and construction signs in accordance with the California Manual of Temporary Traffic Controls or W.A.T.C.H. Handbook. During adverse weather or unusual traffic or working conditions additional traffic devices shall be placed as directed by the Engineer. All traffic signs and TP-9

devices shall also conform to the California Manual of Temporary Traffic Controls or W.A.T.C.H.

Handbook.

The Contractor shall provide and maintain Type II barricades along excavation edges parallel to the flow of traffic at a maximum spacing of twenty -five feet. Type II barricades mounted with flashers shall be installed around work areas in parkways. Type II barricades shall have alternating reflective orange and reflective white stripes at an angle of 45 degrees. The strip width shall be in accordance with Table 5- 1 “Barricade Characteristics” “Manual of Traffic Controls for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones”.

During paving operations, barricades may be supplemented with minimum size eighteen -inch high traffic cones and delineators such that spacing between barricades and/or cones or delineators is no greater than twenty feet. Traffic cones and delineators used within State right - of-way shall be a minimum size of twenty -eight inches high. At all access points such as intersecting streets, alleys and driveways, barricades and/or cones shall be provided at five- foot intervals so as to prevent vehicular access to the paving area. Where access from an intersecting street is prohibited, a “Road Closed” sign shall be provided at the nearest prior intersection. “No Left Turn” signs shall be provided wherever required by the Engineer.

When one-way access from a side street or alley is permitted, barricades and cones shall be provided at five -foot intervals for a distance of fifty feet on either side of the centerline of the intersecting street, or alley.

Should the Contractor fail to furnish a sufficient number of traffic and/or pedestrian safety devices, the Agency will place such necessary items and the Contractor shall be liable to the Agency for providing such devices in accordance with the following provisions:

1. For placing of barricades: $5.00 per barricade for the first day or any part thereof and $2.00 per barricade, per day, for each day thereafter or any part thereof. For flashers: $2.50 per flasher for the first day or any part thereof and $1.00 per flasher, per day, for each day thereafter or any part thereof. For traffic cones:
$1.00 per cone for each day or any part thereof.

2. In the event that the services of the Agency are required between the hours of 5:00 P.M. and 8:00 A.M., during the normal week or at any time on Saturday, Sunday or a Agency holiday, there shall be an additional charge to the above set forth minimums of $188.00 for each service trip required.

Contractor shall relocate, preserve and maintain the visibility of all existing signs within the project limits which affect the flow of traffic, as directed by the Engineer. Any signs which are damaged or found to be missing during the course of construction shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense as directed by the Engineer. All other signs that interfere with the course of work and are not necessary for the safe flow of traffic will be removed and replaced by the Agency. Traffic control signs include Stop Signs, Speed Limit, Parking Restrictions and other regulatory signs.

SECTION 601 – TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR CONSRTUCTION AND

MAINTENANCE WORK ZONES

601-1 GENERAL. A minimum of two (2) lanes (one lane in each direction) shall be maintained at all times for a continuous flow of traffic, except as otherwise approved by the Engineer.

Lane closures shall be allowed between 8:00a.m. and 4:00p.m. only. No traveled lane shall be TP-10

closed overnight without prior City approval. Access to private property shall be maintained at all times.

"Temporary No Parking" signs shall be posted no more than 100 feet apart at least 72 hours prior to work. The signs shall be mounted on either 1” x 2” X 3’ high wood stakes, Type II barricades, or 39-inch high delineators. Signs shall not be posted on trees, traffic signal poles, utility poles, streetlights, or any other street furniture. Signs shall be professionally made of moisture-resistant, heavy duty cardboard or other approved material. "Temporary No Parking" signs shall be maintained by the contractor at all times and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to posting. Cover existing street signs as directed by the Engineer.

"Temporary No Parking" signs shall be implemented for one week only (M -F) at a time. Signs shall be removed and reposted each week as needed and approved by the City.

DURING PAVING OPERATIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE INDIVIDUALS AND EQUIPMENT DESIGNATED TO PERFORM AND MAINTAIN TRAFFIC CONTROL ONLY. The Contractor shall furnish, place and maintain all temporary traffic control devices required for the safe and orderly flow of vehicular and pedestrian traffic during construction. All Traffic control shall conform to the California Manual of Temporary Traffic Controls (California M.U.T.C.D.) or Work Area Traffic Control Handbook (W.A.T.C.H. Handbook).

If traffic control measures are not in conformance with these provisions, the project shall be stopped until conformance is attained to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

At locations where excavations are left open overnight, flashing barricades shall be placed along the excavation at a maximum spacing of 20 feet. A minimum of 3 flashing barricades shall be placed at any one excavation.

Temporary striping will be permitted only on base course and pavement to be overlaid.

Temporary pavement markings to be placed on new asphalt shall be spaced at 25 ft maximum and shall be removable without damage to the new overlay. Method of temporary markings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at the preconstruction meeting.

The Contractor shall submit and obtain written approval of traffic control plans from the Engineer five (5) working days prior to implementing.

Temporary lane closures shall be allowed during working hours specified in these Technical Provisions. Temporary lane closures maintained beyond the normal working hours may have a negative economic effect on the local residential, commercial/industrial business, and traveling public. Unless the Contractor secures prior written approval from the Engineer to maintain temporary lane closures beyond the working hours allowed, the Engineer may deduct a fee from a progress payment or bond for each temporary lane closure maintained beyond the allowed working hours. The fee will be accessed at a rate of Five Hundred ($500) per each travel lane per each thirty (30) minute interval, or fraction thereof as required by the Engineer. In no event will work be allowed past 5 p.m.

TP-11

CSI TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

CITY HALL AND P.D. ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS UPGRADE (1700 W. 162
nd Street)
JN 541

PART 26 – ELECTRICAL

SECTION 519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

519-PART 1 GENERAL

519-1.1 Summary

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 2000 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 2000 V and less.

519-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

519-1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.

519-PART 2 PRODUCTS

519-2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conductors: Aluminum and copper, complying with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

1. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THW Type THW-2 Type THHN/THWN-2 Type XHHW-2 Type UF Type USE and Type SO.

TP-12

B. Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for armored cable, Type AC metal- clad cable, Type MC nonmetallic -sheathed cable, Type NM Type SE Type SO and Type USE with ground wire.

1. VFC Cable: Type TC-ER with oversized cross linked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full - size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

519-2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Description: Factory -fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

519-PART 3 EXECUTION

519-3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4 AWG and larger. Conductors shall be solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 519-3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE

APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs -on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless - steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

TP-13

519-3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer -approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket -weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Apply fire stopping to electrical penetrations of fire- rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Fire stopping."

519-3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors .
3213.13-3.1 Use oxide inhibitor in each splice,
termination, and tap for aluminum
conductors.

A. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

519-3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify and color -code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

519-3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

TP-14

519-3.7 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire- rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire -resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

519-3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative:
3213.13-3.2 After installing conductors and cables
and before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test service entrance and feeder
conductors and conductors feeding
emergency generator equipment and
services for compliance with requirements.
3213.13-3.3 Perform of the following visual and
electrical tests:

A. Compare conductor and cable data with Drawings and Specifications.

B. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct connection according to the single-line diagram.

C. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:
1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.

D. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

E. Inspect for correct identification.

F. Inspect cable jacket and condition.

G. Perform insulation- resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Apply a potential of 500- V dc for 300- V rated cable and 1000- V dc for 600- V rated cable for a one-minute duration.

H. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

I. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

A. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

B. Prepare Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:
3213.13-3.4 Procedures used.
3213.13-3.5 Results that comply with requirements.
3213.13-3.6 Results that do not comply with
requirements and corrective action taken to
achieve compliance with requirements.

SECTION 526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

526-PART 1 GENERAL

526-1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. 526-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

TP-15

526-PART 2 PRODUCTS
526-2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
3213.13-3.7 Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical
Systems.
3213.13-3.8 Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.
3213.13-3.9 ERICO International Corporation.
3213.13-3.10 Fushi Copperweld Inc.
3213.13-3.11 Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical
Products Division, LLC.
3213.13-3.12 Harger Lightning and Grounding.
3213.13-3.13 ILSCO.
3213.13-3.14 O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS
Electrical Group.
3213.13-3.15 Robbins Lightning, Inc.
3213.13-3.16 Siemens Power Transmission &
Distribution, Inc.
526-2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 526-2.3 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1 - 5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned -copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick. 526-2.4 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic -welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless -type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

TP-16

526-2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m). 526-PART 3 EXECUTION
526-3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No.3/0 AWG minimum.
a. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
a. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. b. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated.
c. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. d. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. 526-3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.
526-3.3 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned- copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure- sensitive insulating tape or heat -shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed -metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard- drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods around the pad.

Ground pad- mounted equipment and noncurrent -carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for taps to equipment grounding terminals.
526-3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:
a. Feeders and branch circuits.
b. Lighting circuits.
c. Receptacle circuits.

TP-17

d. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
e. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
f. Flexible raceway runs.
g. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
h. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.
i. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits supplying x-ray equipment.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct - mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat -Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat -tracing cable.

Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.

F. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2. a. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than [No. 8] AWG. b. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper.
c. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor. 526-3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.
a. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.
b. For grounding electrode system, install at least [three] rods spaced at least one- rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes shall be at least 12 inches (300 mm) deep, with cover.
a. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor.

TP-18

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. a. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.
b. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports:

Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. c. Use exothermic -welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect -type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
a. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug- type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
b. Water Meter Piping: Use braided- type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. c. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
i. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 529 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

529-PART 1 GENERAL

SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
529-PART 2 PRODUCTS
529-2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design hanger and support system.

B. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 .

1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

TP-19

529-2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA -4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Material: Pre-galvanized steel, Plain steel, Stainless Steel, Grade 304 Stainless Steel, Grade 316.

2. Channel Width:1-1/4 inches.

3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA -

4. 6. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

7. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory -fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:
3213.13-3.17 Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-
steel stud, for use in hardened portland
cement concrete, steel, or wood, with
tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.

J.
3213.13-3.18 Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-
wedge-type, zinc-coated steel stainless
steel, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout
capacities appropriate for supported loads
and building materials where used.
3213.13-3.19 Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-
iron, slotted support system units are similar
to MSS Type 18 units and comply with
MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
3213.13-3.20 Clamps for Attachment to Steel
Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are
suitable for attached structural element.
3213.13-3.21 Through Bolts: Structural type, hex
head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
3213.13-3.22 Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead
type.

TP-20

3213.13-3.23 Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
529-2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted structural -steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.
529-PART 3 EXECUTION
529-3.1 APPLICATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze -type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single- bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

E. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1 -1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 529-3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.
529-3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
529-3.4 PAINTING
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

TP-21

SECTION 533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

533-PART 1 GENERAL

533-1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Surface raceways.

6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling. 533-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged- cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
533-1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
a. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. b. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer. 533-PART 2 PRODUCTS
533-2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

TP-22

2. Fittings for EMT:
a. Material: Steel.
b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC -Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch (1 mm), with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
533-2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

C. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

D. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

E. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

F. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

G. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

H. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

I. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 533-2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 3R unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.
533-2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainless-steel screws and oil-resistant gaskets.

C. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap- on cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.

TP-23

D. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

E. Solvents and Adhesives: As recommended by conduit manufacturer. 533-2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele- power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

1. C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.

D. Tele-Power Poles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked- enamel finish Aluminum with clear anodized finish.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices, mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele- power pole as required for complete system.
533-2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy aluminum , Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

E. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, rectangular.

1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

H. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb (32 kg).

1. Listing and labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

I. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

TP-24

J. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

K. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

L. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep 4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8 inches deep.

M. Gangable boxes are allowed.

N. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous- hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

O. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, galvanized- steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 533-2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer -Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit -terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass -reinforced polyester resin, with frame and covers of polymer concrete, reinforced concrete, cast iron, hot -dip galvanized-steel diamond plate fiberglass.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open, closed, or integral closed bottom unless otherwise indicated.

TP-25

3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."

6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit -terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
533-PART 3 EXECUTION
533-3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC IMC EMT RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC concrete encased. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFNC.Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground:

NEMA 250, Type 3R.Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.
a. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT ENT or RNC. b. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT RNC identified for such use.
c. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC IMC. Raceway locations include the following:
i. Loading dock.
ii. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.
iii. Mechanical rooms.
d. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT ENT or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
e. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor -Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.
f. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC IMC.
g. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size:3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. a. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
b. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
c. EMT: Use setscrew or compression fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. d. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

TP-26

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F. 533-3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot -water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90- degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

F. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1- inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for each specific location.

5. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
a. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.
b. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub -ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.

J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Coat field -cut threads on PVC -coated raceway with a corrosion -preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

L. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulati ng bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1 -1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1- 1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts.

Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

TP-27

O. Surface Raceways:
a. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points. b. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor -type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

P. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.

Q. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:
a. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.
b. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. c. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
a. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight -run length that exceeds 25 feet.
b. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each of the following locations:
i. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.
ii. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.
iii. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change.
iv. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.
c. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change for PVC conduits. d. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.
e. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. a. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. b. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.

U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw -cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat TP-28

surface for a raintight connection between the box and cover plate or the supported equipment and box.

V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

AA. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 533-3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
a. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.
b. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving." c. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie- in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
d. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub- up at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub- up ducts throughout length of elbow.
e. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub- ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through floor.
i. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the coupling.
ii. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. f. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
533-3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

TP-29

E. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
533-3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL

PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. 533-3.6 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078400 "Firestopping."
533-3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

SECTION 544 – SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECRICAL

RACEWAYS AND CABLING
544-PART 1 GENERAL
544-1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Grout.

5. Silicone sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 078400 "Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items. 544-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
544-PART 2 PRODUCTS
544-2.1 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non- Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized- steel sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
a. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.
b. Minimum Metal Thickness:

TP-30

i. For sleeve cross -section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm) , thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
ii. For sleeve cross -section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm) , thickness shall be

0.138 inch (3.5 mm).
544-2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
544-2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve- type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to match piping OD.
544-2.4 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non- fire-rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post -hardening and volume- adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
544-2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single- component, silicone- based, neutral -curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone- based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. 544-PART 3 EXECUTION
544-3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above- Grade Non- Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry -Unit Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
TP-31

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.

Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot - type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast -iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
544-3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs -on-grade at raceway entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 544-3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls.

Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.

SECTION 548 – SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

548-PART 1 GENERAL

TP-32

548-1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 548-1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Restraint channel bracings.

2. Restraint cables.

3. Seismic-restraint accessories.

4. Mechanical anchor bolts.

5. Adhesive anchor bolts.
548-1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.
a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each seismic-restraint device.

1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading caused by equipment weight, operation, and seismic forces required to select seismic restraints. a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

3. Seismic -Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.
c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).
548-1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control reports.
548-1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with seismic -restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
TP-33

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC -ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.
548-PART 2 PRODUCTS
548-2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC:

2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC:
a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.
b. Component Response Modification Factor: 3.5.
c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 59%.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 59%. 548-2.2 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
A. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion- resistant coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.
548-2.3 RESTRAINT CABLES
A. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized- steel cables. End connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement. 548-2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted- support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

B. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

C. Bushings for Floor -Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

D. Bushing Assemblies for Wall -Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

E. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One- piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.
548-2.5 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

TP-34

548-2.6 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS
A. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled- in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.

Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc -coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
548-PART 3 EXECUTION
548-3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger -rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic -Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.
548-3.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

C. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall -mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

D. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

E. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors.

Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy -duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. 548-3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is TP-35

anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.
548-3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load- spreading members.

2. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

3. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

B. Seismic controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
548-3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

SECTION 553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
553-PART 1 GENERAL

A. Section Includes:

1. Identification for raceways.
544-1.2.2 Identification of power and control cables.
544-1.2.3 Identification for conductors.
544-1.2.4 Underground-line warning tape.
544-1.2.5 Warning labels and signs.
544-1.2.6 Instruction signs.
544-1.2.7 Equipment identification labels, including arc-flash warning labels. 544-1.2.8 Miscellaneous identification products.
553-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study. 553-PART 2 PRODUCTS
553-2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2 .

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
553-2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS
A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1.2 Black letters on an orange field.

1.3 Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type .

A. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

TP-36

1.4 Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

1.5 Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 553-2.3 LABELS
A. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible labels laminated with a clear, weather - and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing label ends.

B. Self-Adhesive Labels:

1.6 Preprinted Write-on, 3-mil- thick, vinyl flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive.

1.7 Vinyl , thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil- thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant, pressure- sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

K. Nominal Size: 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm).
553-2.4 TAPES AND STENCILS:

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self -adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

C. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

D. Underground-Line Warning Tape

1.8 Tape:

L. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

M. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

N. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

1.9 Color and Printing:

O. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and ANSI Z535.5.

P. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE" <Insert inscription>.

Q. Inscriptions for Orange- Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE, COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE".

1.10 Tag: Type I:

R. Pigmented polyolefin, bright colored, continuous -printed on one side with the inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.

S. Width: 3 inches.

T. Thickness: 4 mils. Weight: 18.5 lb/1000 sq. ft.

U. Tensile according to ASTM D 882: 30 lbf and 2500 psi. 553-2.5 Tags
A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch , with stamped legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch 0.023 inch thick, color-coded for phase and voltage level, with factory printed permanent designations; punched for use with self - locking cable tie fastener.

TP-37

C. Write-On Tags:

1.11 Polyester Tags: 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for attachment to raceway, conductor, or cable.

1.12 Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer.

1.13 Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by printer manufacturer.
553-2.6 Signs
A. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1.14 Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

1.15 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

1.16 Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.

A. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:

1.17 Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

1.18 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

1.19 Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.

A. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1.20 Engraved legend.

1.21 Thickness:

V. For signs up to 20 sq. inches, minimum 1/16-inch.

W. For signs larger than 20 sq. inches, 1/8 inch thick.

X. Engraved legend with black letters on white face white letters on a dark grey background.

Y. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners Self- adhesive.

Z. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment. 553-2.7 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self -extinguishing, one piece, self -locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1.22 Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

1.23 Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

1.24 Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

1.25 Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

A. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1.26 Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

1.27 Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

1.28 Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

1.29 Color: Black.

A. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.

1.30 Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

1.31 Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.

1.32 UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.

1.33 Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.

1.34 Color: Black.

MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self -tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless- steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

TP-38

553-PART 3 EXECUTION
553-3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

C. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self -adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

D. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape, with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

E. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1.35 Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

1.36 In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

A. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground- line warning tape directly above cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. 553-3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Accessible Raceways and Metal -Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self -adhesive vinyl labels containing the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1.37 "EMERGENCY POWER."

1.38 "POWER."

1.39 "UPS."
A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1.40 Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage Identification, 600 V or Less: Use industry standard colors for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

AA. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

A. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self -adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

B. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations, provide self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor designation.

C. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field- installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1.41 Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

TP-39

1.42 Use system of marker-tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

1.43 Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual.

A. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground- line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.

1.44 Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

1.45 Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.

A. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush- mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

B. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self - adhesive warning labels.

1.46 Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

1.47 Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

1.48 Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

1.49 For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:

BB. Power-transfer switches.

CC. Controls with external control power connections.

A. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive thermal transfer vinyl labels.

1.50 Comply with NFPA 70E and ANSI Z535.4.

1.51 Comply with CEC 110.16 and 110.21(A)(B) requirements for arc-flash warning labels.

A. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

B. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

C. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.

1.52 Labeling Instructions:

DD. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

EE. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

FF. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

GG. Unless labels are provided with self -adhesive means of attachment, fasten them with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

TP-40

SECTION 2213 - LOW-VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
2213-PART 1 - GENERAL
2213-1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution, dry-type transformers with a nominal primary and secondary rating of 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1500 kVA.

2213-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

2213-1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for transformers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

2213-1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

D. Operation and maintenance data.

TP-41

2213-1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

2213-PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2213-2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. EATON

2. SQUARE D

3. SIEMENS

2213-2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Transformers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the transformer will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified[ and the transformer will be fully operational after the seismic event]."

2213-2.3 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

C. Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 DOE 2016 efficiency levels.

2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL.

D. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin encapsulated.

E. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

F. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Coil Material: Aluminum.

2. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

3. Terminal Connections: Bolted.

TP-42

G. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color -code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2213-2.4 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound using a vacuum-pressure impregnation process to seal out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

3. Wiring Compartment: Sized for conduit entry and wiring installation.

E. Taps for Transformers 3 kVA and Smaller: None.

F. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

H. Insulation Class, Smaller Than 30 kVA: 180 deg C, UL- component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

I. Insulation Class, 30 kVA and Larger: 220 deg C, UL- component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

J. Grounding: Provide ground -bar kit or a ground bar installed on the inside of the transformer enclosure.

K. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

2213-2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated- acrylic or melamine plastic signs for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion- resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Nameplates: Self -adhesive label for each distribution transformer. Self -adhesive labels are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2213-PART 3 - EXECUTION

2213-3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient -temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by TP-43

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

2213-3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounted transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated from design drawings signed and sealed by a licensed structural engineer.

1. Coordinate installation of wall -mounted and structure- hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

B. Install transformers level and plumb on a concrete base with vibration- dampening supports.

Locate transformers away from corners and not parallel to adjacent wall surface.

C. Construct concrete bases according to Section 033000 "Cast -in-Place Concrete "Section 033053 "Miscellaneous Cast -in-Place Concrete" and anchor floor -mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions, seismic codes applicable to Project, and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

D. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer -recommended torques to reduce noise generation.

F. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.
2213-3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.

2213-3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

TP-44

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative.

D. Small (Up to 167- kVA Single -Phase or 500- kVA Three- Phase) Dry -Type Transformer Field Tests:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.

a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
b. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
c. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been removed.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests recommended by manufacturer.
f. Verify that as-left tap connections are as specified. g. Verify the presence of surge arresters and that their ratings are as specified.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Measure resistance at each winding, tap, and bolted connection. b. Perform insulation- resistance tests winding- to-winding and each winding- to- ground. Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

Calculate polarization index: the value of the index shall not be less than 1.0. c. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Test results shall not deviate by more than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the calculated ratio.

If test fails, replace the transformer.
d. Verify correct secondary voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral, after energization and prior to loading.

E. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

F. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

2213-3.5 CLEANING

G. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

SECTION 2413 - SWITCHBOARDS

2413-PART1 GENERAL

2413-1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.

2. Transient voltage suppression devices.

3. Disconnecting and over current protective devices.

4. Instrumentation.

5. Control power.

TP-45

6. Accessory components and features.

7. Identification.
2413-1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event]." 2413-1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of over current protective device included in switchboards.

3. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2413-1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, over current protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." B. Field quality-control reports.
2413-1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
2413-1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Comply with UL 891: Standard for Dead-Front Switchboards.

E. Comply with UL 50 : Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

F. Comply with UL 869A : Reference Standard for Service Equipment. 2413-1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2413-PART 2 PRODUCTS
2413-2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

TP-46

B. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Panel mounted.

2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.

3. Sections front and rear aligned.

D. Nominal System Voltage: 208Y/120 V.

E. Main-Bus Continuous: See Respective Building Plans for Bus. Information.

F. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
G. Enclosure: Steel, NEMA 250, indoor Type 1, outdoor type 3R.

1. Enclosure Finish: Factory -applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

2. Enclosure: Flat roof; bolt -on rear covers for each section, with provisions for padlocking.

H. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated, barrier compartment and section complying with utility company's requirements. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and align with basic switchboard. Provide service entrance label and necessary applicable service entrance features.

I. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.

J. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank compartments.

K. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.

2. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily removable for drilling and cutting.

3. Bottom shall be insulating, fire -resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into switchboard.

4. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables indicated, including those for future installation.

L. Phase and Neutral Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated. Tin- plated, high- strength, electrical -grade aluminum alloy with tin- plated aluminum circuit-breaker line connections.

1. Ground Bus: 1/4 -by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) minimum size, hard- drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.

2. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

TP-47

3. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.

M. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment. 2413-2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series -connected rating to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time- current element for low -level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front - mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field- replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip.
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let -through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high- intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.
d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time- delay settings, push- to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 75 percent of rated voltage.
f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional time delay.
g. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit -breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position. 2413-2.3 INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

2. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA.

3. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground- Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary wiring to ground over current relays, via shorting terminals, to provide TP-48

selective tripping of main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit - breaker, ground-fault protection.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:

1. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy tolerances as indicated:
a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Megawatts: Plus or minus 2 percent.
e. Megavars: Plus or minus 2 percent.
f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
h. Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: Plus or minus 2 percent; accumulated values unaffected by power outages up to 72 hours. i. Megawatt Demand: Plus or minus 2 percent; demand interval programmable from five to 60 minutes.

2. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.
2413-2.4 CONTROL POWER
A. Control Circuits: 120 -V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control - power transformer.

B. Electrically Interlocked Main and Tie Circuit Breakers: Two control -power transformers in separate compartments, with interlocking relays, connected to the primary side of each control-power transformer at the line side of the associated main circuit breaker. 120-V secondaries connected through automatic transfer relays to ensure a fail -safe automatic transfer scheme.

C. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current -limiting and overload protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.

D. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included.

Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units. 2413-2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid- state trip devices without removing from switchboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchboard meters and switchboard class relays.

B. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall -mounted, lockable, compartmented steel box or cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.
2413-2.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for switchboards with one or more service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. 2413-PART 3 EXECUTION
2413-3.1 INSTALLATION
B. Receive, inspect, handle, store and install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400.

TP-49

C. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal thickness. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18 -inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

1. For supported equipment, install epoxy -coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

F. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
G. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

H. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

I. Install spare-fuse cabinet.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

K. Comply with requirements for terminating feeder bus specified in Section 262500 "Enclosed Bus Assemblies." Drawings indicate general arrangement of bus, fittings, and specialties.

L. Comply with requirements for terminating cable trays specified in Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems." Drawings indicate general arrangement of cable trays, fittings, and specialties.
2413-3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field- installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
2413-3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

TP-50

2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

SECTION 2416 - PANELBOARDS

2416-PART 1 GENERAL

2416-1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
2416-1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

B. SPD: Surge protective device.
2416-1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection, knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

6. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.

7. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

8. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

9. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.

10. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards.
2416-1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Panelboard schedules for installation in panelboards. 2416-1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.

TP-51

2416-1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.
2416-1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 24 months from date of Substantial Completion. 2416-PART 2 PRODUCTS
2416-2.1 PANELBOARDS COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Enclosures: Flush and Surface -mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
c. Kitchen Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, type 12 .

2. Height: 84 inches maximum.

3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface -mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush -mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

4. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

F. Incoming Mains Location: Top Bottom
G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Tin-plated aluminum.

H. Include instructions in "Conductor Connectors" Paragraph below if special sizing or oversizing of lugs is required, if allowing optional use of aluminum for circuits sized for copper conductors, or when upsizing conductors for voltage drop.

I. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in the panelboard.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard.

TP-52

4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

J. NRTL Label: Panelboards shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards shall have meter enclosures, wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company for exact requirements.

K. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

L. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series -connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL.

Include label or manual with size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices listed and labeled by an NRTL for series-connected short-circuit rating.

M. Panelboard Short -Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short - circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.
2416-2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2416-2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS
A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

B. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker Lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit -Breaker Frame S izes 125 A and Smaller: Plug-in circuit breakers Bolt-on circuit breakers.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit -Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

G. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanic ally held, general -purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panel board.

1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit 24-V control circuit. 2416-2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

B. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt -on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

D. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general -purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

TP-53

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

F. Column-Type Panelboards: Single row of overcurrent devices with narrow gutter extension and overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses. 2416-2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with series -connected rating interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:
a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit -breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front - mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:
a. RMS sensing.
b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.
c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays. d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data.
e. Ten-event, trip -history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and magnitude of fault that caused the trip.
f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer. g. Field-Adjustable Settings:
1) Instantaneous trip.
2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.
3) Long and short time adjustments.
4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let -through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single - and double- pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Subfeed Circuit Breakers: Vertically mounted.

9. MCCB Features and Accessories:
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.
c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings. d. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting circuits.

TP-54

f. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote- mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time- delay settings, push- to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.
g. Communication Capability: Universal -mounted Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
h. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.
i. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit -breaker handle in on or off position.
j. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit -breaker handle in on position.

B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
2416-2.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.
2416-2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid- state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.
2416-PART 3 EXECUTION
2416-3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

F. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.

I. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

J. Stub four 1- inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

TP-55

K. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties. 2416-3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in power panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
E. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit. 2416-3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test for low -voltage air circuit breakers stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results, with comparisons of the two scans. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

SECTION 2713 – ELECTRICITY METERING

2713-PART 1 GENERAL
2713-1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes equipment for electricity metering by utility company. 2713-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and wiring diagrams.

TP-56

2713-1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
2713-1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Application and operating software documentation.

2. Software licenses.

3. Software service agreement.

4. Hard copies of manufacturer's operating specifications, design user's guides for software and hardware, and PDF files on CD-ROM of the hard-copy Submittal. 2713-1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2713-1.6 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade his computer equipment if necessary. 2713-PART 2 PRODUCTS
2713-2.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY A. Meters will be furnished by utility company.

B. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical -power utility company.

C. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical-power utility company.

D. Meter Sockets: Steady -state and short -circuit current ratings shall meet indicated circuit ratings.

E. Modular Meter Center: Factory -coordinated assembly of a main service disconnect device, wireways, tenant meter socket modules, and tenant feeder circuit breakers arranged in adjacent vertical sections. Assembly shall be complete with interconnecting buses and other features as specified below.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

TP-57

3. Comply with requirements of utility company for meter center.

4. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

5. Minimum Short -Circuit Rating: 42,000 A symmetrical at rated voltage or as specified on plan.

6. Main Disconnect Device: Circuit breaker, series -combination rated for use with downstream feeder and branch circuit breakers.

7. Main Disconnect Device: Fusible switch, series -combination rated by circuit - breaker manufacturer to protect downstream feeder and branch circuit breakers.

8. Tenant Feeder Circuit Breakers: Series -combination-rated molded- case units, rated to protect circuit breakers in downstream tenant and to house loadcenters and panelboards that have 10,000-A interrupting capacity. a. Identification: Complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" with legend identifying tenant's address.
b. Physical Protection: Tamper resistant, with hasp for padlock.

9. Meter Socket: Rating coordinated with indicated tenant feeder circuit rating.

10. Surge Protection: For main disconnect device, comply with requirements in Section 264313 "Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits." 2713-2.2 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY OWNER
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. E-Mon; a division of Hunt Power.

2. National Meter Industries.

3. Osaki Meter Sales, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. General Requirements for Owner's Meters:

1. Comply with UL 1244.

2. Meters used for billing shall have an accuracy of 0.2 percent of reading, complying with requirements in ANSI C12.20.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1 minimum, with hasp for padlocking or sealing.

4. Identification: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

5. Memory Backup: Self -contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of 72 hours, minimum.

6. Sensors: Current -sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum range and accuracy for meters indicated for this application. a. Type: Split and solid core.

7. Current-Transformer Cabinet: Listed or recommended by metering equipment manufacturer for use with sensors indicated.

D. Kilowatt-hour Meter: Electronic single-phase meters, measuring electricity used.

1. Voltage and Phase Configuration: Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with voltage rating and phase configuration indicated for its application.

TP-58

2. Display: LCD with characters not less than 0.25 inch (6 mm) high, indicating accumulative kilowatt -hours and current kilowatt load. Retain accumulated kilowatt-hour in a nonvolatile memory, until reset.

3. Display: Digital electromechanical counter, indicating accumulative kilowatt - hours.

E. Kilowatt-hour/Demand Meter: Electronic single- phase meters, measuring electricity use and demand. Demand shall be integrated over a 15-minute interval.

1. Voltage and Phase Configuration: Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with voltage rating and phase configuration indicated for its application.

2. Display: LCD with characters not less than 0.25 inch (6 mm) high, indicating accumulative kilowatt-hours, current time and date, current demand, and historic peak demand, and time and date of historic peak demand. Retain accumulated kilowatt-hour and historic peak demand in a nonvolatile memory, until reset.

F. Data Transmission Cable: Transmit KY pulse data over Class 1 control -circuit conductors in raceway. Comply with Section 260523 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
G. Software: PC based, a product of meter manufacturer, suitable for calculation of utility cost allocation and billing.

1. Utility Cost Allocation: Automatically import energy -usage records to allocate energy costs for the following:
a. At least 15 departments.
b. At least 30 tenants.
c. At least five processes.
d. At least five buildings.

2. Tenant or Activity Billing Software: Automatically import energy-usage records to automatically compute and prepare tenant bills activity demand and energy -use statements based on metering of energy use and peak demand. Maintain separate directory for each tenant's historical billing information. Prepare summary reports in user-defined formats and time intervals. 2713-PART 3 EXECUTION
2713-3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.

B. Install meters furnished by utility company. Install raceways and equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide empty conduits for metering leads and extend grounding connections as required by utility company.

C. Install modular meter center according to NECA 400 switchboard installation requirements.

D. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Series Combination Warning Label: Self -adhesive type, with text as required by NFPA 70.

2. Equipment Identification Labels: Adhesive film labels with clear protective overlay. For residential meters, provide an additional card holder suitable for typewritten card with occupant's name.
2713-3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.

TP-59

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Connect a load of known kilowatt rating, 1.5 kW minimum, to a circuit supplied by metered feeder.

2. Turn off circuits supplied by metered feeder and secure them in off condition.

3. Run test load continuously for eight hours minimum, or longer, to obtain a measurable meter indication. Use test -load placement and setting that ensures continuous, safe operation.

4. Check and record meter reading at end of test period and compare with actual electricity used, based on test -load rating, duration of test, and sample measurements of supply voltage at test-load connection. Record test results.

C. Electricity metering will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

SECTION 2726 – WIRING DEVICES

2726-PART 1 GENERAL
2726-1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Straight-blade convenience receptacles.

2. USB charger devices.

3. GFCI receptacles.

4. SPD receptacles.

5. Toggle switches.

6. Decorator-style convenience.

7. Wall switch sensor light switches with dual technology sensors.

8. Wall switch sensor light switches with passive infrared sensors.

9. Wall switch sensor light switches with ultrasonic sensors.

10. Digital timer light switches.

11. Residential devices.

12. Wall-box dimmers.

13. Wall plates.
2726-1.2 DEFINITIONS
Retain terms that remain after this Section has been edited for a project.

Abbreviated manufacturers' names are used throughout the remainder of this Section.

A. Abbreviations of Manufacturers' Names:

1. Cooper: Copper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Hubbell: Hubbell Incorporated: Wiring Devices-Kellems.

3. Leviton: Leviton Mfg. Company, Inc.

4. Pass & Seymour: Pass& Seymour/Legrand.
2726-1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

TP-60

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. 2726-1.4 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

Not all standard devices are available with a modular plug- in configuration. For example, this Section does not include specifications for modular devices.

C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug- in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

D. Devices for Owner-Furnished Equipment:

1. Receptacles: Match plug configurations.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.
2726-1.5 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
NEMA 5-20R specified below is a heavier duty, typically referred to as "Commercial" grade receptacle. For NEMA 5-15R receptacles, see "Decorator -Style Devices" and "Residential Devices" articles.

A. Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
2726-1.6 USB CHARGER DEVICES
A. Tamper-Resistant, USB Charger Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 1310, and FS W-C-596.

1. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel- plated, brass mounting strap.

2. USB Receptacles: Dual, Type A.

3. Line Voltage Receptacles: Dual two pole, three wire, and self-grounding. 2726-1.7 GFCI RECEPTACLES
Non-feed-through-type GFCI unit shall be selected where no protection of downstream receptacles is required.

A. General Description:

1. 125 V, 20 A, straight blade, non-feed -through type.

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection.
2726-1.8 SPD RECEPTACLES
TP-61

See "Surge Protective Device (SPD) Receptacles" Article in the Evaluations for information on SPD ratings.

B. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C- 596, with integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

1. 125 V, 20 A, straight blade type.

2. SPD Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of 400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

3. Active SPD Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."
C. Duplex SPD Convenience Receptacles:

1. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.

D. Isolated-Ground Duplex SPD Convenience Receptacles:

1. Description:

HH. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.

II. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 2726-1.9 TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Single Pole:

2. Two Pole:

3. Three Way:

4. Four Way:

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Single pole, with LED-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is off.

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

1. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

F. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. 2726-1.10 DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES
Convenience receptacles in this article are commercial grade, 15 A, duplex.

A. Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498.

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498.

1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section.

TP-62

C. Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498.

1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section, when installed in wet and damp locations.

D. GFCI, Feed and Non- Feed-Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.

E. GFCI, Tamper -Resistant and Weather -Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.

1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section.

F. Toggle Switches: Square Face, 120/277 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W- S-896.

G. Lighted Toggle Switches: Square Face, 120 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

1. Description: With LED-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is off. 2726-1.11 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, DUAL TECHNOLOGY A. Description: Switchbox -mounted, combination lighting -control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using dual technology.

1. Connections: Hard wired.

2. Connections: Wireless.

3. Rated 10 A at 120-V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120-V ac.

4. Adjustable time delay of 10 minutes.
"Automatic-On" mode turns on lights when motion is sensed. "Manual -On" mode requires that the switch be depressed to turn on lights. Both modes use motion sensing to keep lights on.

5. Able to be locked to Manual-On mode.

6. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux).

7. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
2726-1.12 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, PASSIVE INFRARED A. Description: Switchbox -mounted, combination, lighting- control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using passive infrared technology.

1. Connections: Hard wired.

2. Connections: Wireless.

3. Rated 10 A at 120-V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120-V ac.

5. Able to be locked to Manual-On mode.

6. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux).

7. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
2726-1.13 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, ULTRASONIC
TP-63

A. Description: Switchbox -mounted, combination, lighting- control sensor and conventional switch lighting-control unit using ultrasonic technology.

1. Connections: Hard wired.

2. Connections: Wireless.

3. Rated 10 A at 120-V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120-V ac.

4. Adjustable time delay of 15 minutes.
"Automatic-On" mode turns on lights when motion is sensed. "Manual -On" mode requires that the switch be depressed to turn on lights. Both modes use motion sensing to keep lights on.

5. Able to be locked to Automatic-On, Manual-On mode.

6. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux).

7. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
2726-1.14 DIGITAL TIMER LIGHT SWITCH
A. Description: Switchbox -mounted, combination digital timer and conventional switch lighting- control unit, with backlit digital display, with selectable time interval in 10-minute increments.

1. Rated 10 A at 120-V ac for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hp at 120-V ac.

2. Integral relay for connection to BAS.
2726-1.15 RESIDENTIAL DEVICES
Receptacles in this article are usually considered residential grade, for installation in dwelling units.

A. Residential-Grade, Tamper -Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section.

B. Weather-Resistant and Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

C. Fan-Speed Controls:

1. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters.

2. Comply with UL 1917.

The 5-A rating in first subparagraph below allows more than one fan to be controlled by the same device.

3. Continuously adjustable rotary knob, 1.5 A.

4. Three-speed adjustable rotary knob, 1.5 A.

Coordinate "Telephone Outlet" Paragraph below with Section 271500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
D. Telephone Outlet:

In determining cable category in "Description" Subparagraph below, Category 5e and Category 6 are covered by the referenced TIA/EIA standard. Use of Category 3 cabling may be permitted by authorities having jurisdiction; however, this category is covered by an obsolete TIA/EIA standard.

1. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.

TP-64

E. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:

1. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.
2726-1.16 WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full -wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on- off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

Four-way switching may be added to "Control" Paragraph below after verifying availability with manufacturers.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single- pole or three- way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. LED Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with LED lamps; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.
2726-1.17 WALL PLATES
D. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

Third option in "Material for Finished Spaces" Subparagraph below is also available in Type 430 but is susceptible to rust and corrosion even in finished spaces.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

E. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather - resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2726-1.18 FINISHES
See "Device Configurations, Ratings, and Grades" Article in the Evaluations for a discussion of wiring-device colors. Coordinate with Drawings.

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

3. SPD Devices: Blue.

4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

EXECUTION
2726-1.19 INSTALLATION
NECA 1 referenced in first paragraph below includes device mounting- height requirements. See "Mounting Heights and Locations" Article in the Evaluations for device mounting heights in that standard.

TP-65

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

See "Device Configurations, Ratings, and Grades" in the Evaluations for timing and sequencing of construction to help avoid contamination of devices during construction.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

JJ. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

KK. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

LL. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra- deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

2. Verify that dimmers used for fan-speed control are listed for that application.

3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

TP-66

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. GFCI Receptacles: Install non- feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is not required.
2726-1.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

B. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

MM. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

NN. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.

OO. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

PP. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

QQ. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

RR. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

See Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.

D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

SECTION 2816 - ENCLOSED SWICHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

GENERAL
2816-1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Receptacle switches.

4. Shunt trip switches.

5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

6. Enclosures.
2816-1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

TP-67

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
2816-1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2816-1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 2816-1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

B. Field quality-control reports.
2816-1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
2816-1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PRODUCTS
2816-1.8 FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240 -V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240- V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate [specified] fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240- V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified TP-68

fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

F. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 -V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

G. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

4. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. 2816-1.9 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240- V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 240- V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

F. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 240 -V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

G. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. 2816-1.10 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

TP-69

B. Basis-of-Design Product : Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

D. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time- current element for low -level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field- replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let -through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

G. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high- intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self - powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time -delay settings, push- to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit -breaker contacts.
2816-1.11 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

3. Kitchen Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

TP-70

EXECUTION
2816-1.12 INSTALLATION
A. Install individual wall- mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.
2816-1.13 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field- installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. 2816-1.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on -site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

SECTION 3213.13 - DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS
3213.13-PART 1 GENERAL
3213.13-1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes packaged engine generators used to supply non- emergency power, with the following features:

1. Diesel engine.

TP-71

2. Diesel fuel-oil system.

3. Control and monitoring.

4. Generator overcurrent and fault protection.

5. Generator, exciter, and voltage regulator.

6. Vibration isolation devices.

7. Finishes.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine generators.

2. Any exceptions to the published specifications shall be subject to the approval, of the engineer and submitted 1- days prior to the closing of the bid with a line by line summary description of all the items of compliance, any items that have been are omitted or have been taken exception to, and a complete description of all deviations.

3. It is the intent of this specification to secure a generator set system that has been testing during design verification, in production and at the final job site. The generator set will be a commercial design and will be complete with all of the necessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans, drawings, and specification herein. The equipment supplies shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and application local cord and regulations.

4. All equipment shall be new and of current production by an international, power system Manufacture of generators, transfer switches and paralleling switchgear. The manufacture shall be a supplier of a complete and coordinated system. There will be a single source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a factory-authorized representative with factory-trained technicians.

5. Vibration Isolation Base Details fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Included base weights.

6. Include diagrams for po9wer signal and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for engine generators and functional relationship between all electrical component.

3213.13-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans and elevations for engine generator and other components specified.

Indicate access requirements affected by height of subbase fuel tank.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain.

4. Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for engine generators and functional relationship between all electrical components.
3213.13-1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer manufacturer and testing agency.

TP-72

B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for engine generator, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Warranty.
3213.13-1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.

B. Maintenance Contracts.

C. Maintenance Materials

1. Provide two (2) copies of the following documents and manuals for the engine, the alternator, and the generator set:

SS. Operation Manuals
TT. Parts Catalog
UU. Service Manuals
VV. Installation Manuals
WW. Wiring Diagrams
XX. NFPA-110 Startup and Test procedure

2. Provide one (1) copy of the following documents and manuals for the engine, the alternator and the generator set.

YY. Operation Manual
ZZ. Warranty Certificate
AAA. Installation Manuals
BBB. Wiring Diagrams
CCC. Specification Sheets
3213.13-1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 3213.13-1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. 3213.13-PART 2 - PRODUCTS
3213.13-2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Caterpillar Inc.

B. Cummins Power Generation
TP-73

C. Generac Power Systems
D. Kohler Power Systems
3213.13-2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance: Engine generator housing, subbase fuel tank, engine generator, batteries, battery racks, silencers, load banks, sound attenuating equipment, accessories, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Shake-table testing shall comply with ICC-ES AC156. Testing shall be performed with all fluids at worst-case normal levels. Water shall be substituted for diesel fuel in fuel tank during
test.

3. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

E. B11 Compliance: Comply with B11.19.

B. NFPA Compliance: 1. Comply with NFPA 37. 2. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with and listed to UL 2200.

D. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with EPA Tier 4 requirements and applicable state and local government currently emission requirements for emergency stand-by generator.

E. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by engine generator including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling- sir intake and discharge, and other components of installation.

F. Environment Conditions: Engine generator system shall withstand the following environments Condition without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 104 deg F. (Minus 15 to plus 40 degree C.

2. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 p;ercent.

3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet (300 m).

G. Unusual Service Conditions: Engine generator equipment and installation are required to Operate under the following conditions:

1. High salt-dust content in the air due to sea-spray evaporation. 3213.13-2.3 ENGINE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Factory-assembled and -tested, water-cooled engine, with brushless generator and accessories.

TP-74

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

C. Power Rating: Industrial.

D. Overload Capacity: 110 percent of service load for 1 hour in 12 consecutive hours.

E. Service Load: 438 kVA.

F. Power Factor: 0.8 lagging.

G. Frequency: 60 Hz.

H. Voltage: 208 V ac.

I. Phase: Three-phase, four wire, wye.

J. Induction Method: Turbocharged.

K. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

L. Mounting Frame: Structural steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and engine generator center of gravity.

M. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated at 0.8 power factor excluding power required for the continued and repeated operation of the unit and auxiliaries, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing].

2. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component.

N. Engine Generator Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step- load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step- load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.

8. Start Time: 10 seconds.

TP-75

3213.13-2.4 DIESEL ENGINE
A. Fuel: ASTM D975, diesel fuel oil, Grade 2-D S15.

B. Engine: The minimum 6.8 -liter displacement engine shall deliver a minimum of 315 HP at a governed engine speed of 1800 rpm and shall be equipped with the following:
a) Electronic isochronous governor capable of 0.25% steady -state frequency regulation.
b) 24-volt positive engagement solenoid shift-starting motor. c) 45-ampere automatic battery charging alternator with a solid- state voltage regulation.
d) Positive displacement, full pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick and oil drain.
e) Dry type replaceable air cleaner elements for normal applications. f) Engine driven or electric fuel-transfer pump including fuel filter and electric solenoid fuel shut-off valve capable of lifting fuel.
g) The turbocharged engine shall be fueled by diesel.
h) The engine shall have a minimum of 6 cylinders and the liquid cooled. i) The engine shall be EPA certified from the factory.
j) The generator must accept rated load in one -step.

C. Lubrication System: Engine or skid-mounted.

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

D. Jacket Coolant Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with UL 499[ and with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

E. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed- loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, UV-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum.
b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

F. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.

2. Sound level measured at a distance of 25 feet (8 m) from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall be 78 dBA or less.

TP-76

G. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy duty, engine- mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry -filter element and “blocked filter” indicator.

H. Starting System: 12, 24-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they are not damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds.

4. Battery: Nickel cadmium, with capacity within ambient temperature range specified in "Performance Requirements" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 50 deg F (10 deg C) regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. Provide ventilation to exhaust battery gases.

7. Battery Stand: Factory-fabricated, two-tier metal with acid-resistant finish designed to hold the quantity of battery cells required and to maintain the arrangement to minimize lengths of battery interconnections.

8. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

9. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing, and float-charging type designed for nickel-cadmium batteries. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float -charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 to 140 deg F (minus 40 to plus 60 deg C) to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates. e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery - charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet. 3213.13-2.5 DIESEL FUEL-OIL SYSTEM
A. Comply with NFPA 37.

B. Piping: Fuel -oil piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel, complying with requirements in Section 231113 "Facility Fuel -Oil Piping." Cast iron, aluminum, copper, and galvanized steel shall not be used in the fuel-oil system.

C. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine to provide primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

D. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 1 micron.

E. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

TP-77

F. Fuel-Oil Storage Tank: Comply with requirements in "Facility skid- mounted Aboveground Fuel-Oil Storage Tanks."

1. Fuel Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for an uninterrupted period of 36 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine generator system without being refilled,

2. Duplex Fuel-Oil Transfer Pump: Comply with requirements in "Facility Fuel-Oil Pumps." G. Day Tank: Comply with UL 142, freestanding, factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly, with integral, float-controlled transfer pump and the following features:

1. Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 150 percent of nominal capacity of day tank.
a. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible and visual alarm in the event of day-tank leak.

2. Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for a skid-mounted uninterrupted period of 4 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine-generator system without being refilled.

3. Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine-mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from engine.

4. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25 percent of normal fuel level.

5. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level.

6. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve.

7. Redundant High-Level Fuel Shutoff: Actuated by high-level alarm sensor in day tank to operate a separate motor-control device that disconnects day-tank pump motor. Sensor shall signal solenoid valve, located in fuel suction line between fuel storage tank and day tank, to close. Both actions shall remain in shutoff state until manually reset. Shutoff action shall initiate an alarm signal to control panel but shall not shut down engine generator.

H. Subbase-Mounted, Double -Wall, Fuel -Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel-oil tank. Features include the following:

1. Tank level indicator.

2. Fuel-Tank Capacity: Minimum 133 percent of total fuel required for planned operation plus fuel for periodic maintenance operations between fuel refills.

3. Leak detection in interstitial space.

4. Vandal-resistant fill cap.

5. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3213.13-2.6 CONTROL AND MONITORING
Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode- selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote- control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of engine generator. When mode- selector switch is switched to the on position, engine generator starts. The off position of same switch initiates engine generator shutdown. When engine generator is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and initiate alarms.

A. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on- off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts engine generator. The off position of same switch initiates engine generator shutdown. When engine generator is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and initiate alarms.

B. Provide minimum run time control set for 30 minutes with override only by operation of a remote emergency-stop switch.

C. Comply with UL 508A.

TP-78

D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the engine generator. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from engine generator vibration. Panel shall be powered from the engine generator battery.

E. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common wall -mounted control and monitoring panel. Panel shall be powered from the engine generator battery.

F. Control and Monitoring Panel:

1. Digital engine generator controller with integrated LCD display, controls, and microprocessor, capable of local and remote control, monitoring, and programming, with battery backup.

2. Analog control panel with dedicated gages and indicator lights for the instruments and alarms indicated below.

3. Instruments: Located on the control and monitoring panel and viewable during operation. a. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
b. Engine-coolant temperature gage.
c. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
d. Running-time meter.
e. AC voltmeter, for each phase connected to a phase selector switch.
f. AC ammeter, for each phase connected to a phase selector switch.
g. AC frequency meter.
h. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.

4. Controls and Protective Devices: Controls, shutdown devices, and common alarm indication, including the following:
a. Cranking control equipment.
b. Run-Off-Auto switch.
c. Control switch not in automatic position
alarm.
d. Overcrank alarm
e. Overcrank shutdown device.,
f. Low-water temperature alarm.
g. High engine temperature pre-alarm.
h. High engine temperature.
i. High engine temperature shutdown device.
j. Overspeed alarm.
k. Overspeed shutdown device.
l. Low fuel main tank.
m. Coolant low-level alarm.
n. Coolant low-level shutdown device.
o. Coolant high-temperature pre-alarm.
p. Coolant high-temperature alarm.
q. Coolant low-temperature alarm.
r. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.
s. Battery high-voltage alarm.
t. Low cranking voltage alarm.
u. Battery charge malfunction alarm.
v. Battery low-voltage alarm.
w. Lamp test.
x. Contacts for local and remote common alarm.
y. Low-starting air pressure alarm.
z. Low-starting hydraulic pressure alarm.
aa. Remote manual stop shutdown device.
bb. Air shutdown damper alarm when used.
cc. Air shutdown damper shutdown device when used.

TP-79

dd. Generator overcurrent-protective-device when used.
ee. Hours of operation.
ff. Engine generator metering, including voltage, current Hertz, kilowatt, kilovolt ampere and power factor.

G. Supporting items: Include sensors, Transducers, terminals relays and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator unless otherwise indicated.

3213.13-2.7 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Overcurrent protective devices shall be coordinated to optimize selective when a short circuit occurs.

B. Generator Circuit Breaker: For emergency lighting and power molded- case, Thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated, complying with UL 489.

C. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.

D. Trip Rating: Matched to generator output rating.

E. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when engine generator is shut down by other protective devices.

F. Mounting: Adjacent to, or integrated with, control and monitoring panel.

G. Generator Circuit Breaker: For optional stand- by power Molded- case, electronic-trip type, 100 percent rated: complying with UL 489.

H. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous.

I. Trip settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.

J. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when engine generator is shut down by other protective devices.

K. Mounting: Adjacent to, or integrated with, control and monitoring panel.

L. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other engine generator protective devices, a shunt -trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector performs the following functions:

M. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other engine generator malfunction alarms. Contacts shall be available for load shed functions.

N. Under single-or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full - load current for up to 10 seconds.

O. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the e4xcitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the engine generator.

P. Senses clearing of a fault by overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.

3213.13-2.8 GENERATOR EXCITER AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1-32, 40 Temperature rise limits.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H per UL 1446.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. Provide 12-lead alternator.

E. Range: Provide broad range of output voltage by adjusting the excitation level.

F. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due top vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

G. Enclosure: Drip proof.

H. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

J. Adjusting Rheostat on Control and Monitoring Panel:

K. Maintain voltage within 20 percent on one step, full load.

TP-80

L. Provide Anti-hunt provision to stabilize voltage.

M. Maintain frequency within 5 percent and stabilize at rated frequency within 5 seconds.

N. Strip; Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arrange to maintain stator windings above dew point.

O. Windings; Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

P. Sub-transient Reactance: 12 percent maximum.

3213.13-2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.

B. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical -limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory -drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4- inch-(6 mm_) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside, and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.,
C. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

D. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load.

E. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

F. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

G. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch (25 mm).

H. Vibration isolation devices shall not be used to accommodate misalignments or to make bends.

3213.13-2.10 HOUSING

1. Weather Enclosure.

A. The generator set enclosure shall be a factory assembled package constructed from a minimum of high strength, low alloy 14-gauge steel. The enclosure shall have a pitched enclosure roof to prevent water accumulation, and a radiator fill panel to provide easy service access to the radiator. The enclosure shall be manufactured from bolted panels to facilitate service, future modifications, or field replacement.

B. The enclosure munt component and skid shall be cleaned with a two- stage alkaline cleaning process to remove grease, grit, and grime from parts. Components shall then be subjected to a Zirconium-based conversion coating process to prepare the metal for electrocoat adhesion. All parts shall receive a 100% epoxy primer electrocoat with high- edge protection. Following the e- coat process, the parts shall be finish coated with powder baked paint for superior finish, durability, and appearance with a power Armor TM industrial finish that provides heavy duty durability in harsh conditions, and is fade-, scratch- and corrosion- resistant.

C. The enclosure must surpass a 3000-hour salt spray corrosion test per ASTM B-1117.

D. The enclosures shall allow the generator set to operate at full load in an ambient temperature of 40-50 degree C with no additional derating of the electrical output of the generator set.

E. Enclosure shall be equipped with sufficient side and end doors to allow access for operation, inspection, and service of the unit and all options. Minimum requirements are two doors per side.

When the generator set controller faces the rear of the generator set, an additional rear facing door is required. Access to the controller and main line circuit breaker shall meet the requirement of the National Electric Code.

F. Doors shall be hinged with stainless steel lift off hingers, and hardware, and the doors shall be4 removable. Access doors shall be4 rubber sealed to prevent watt intrusion and to minimize noise.

G. Doors shall be equipped with lockable latches, Locks shall be keyed alike. Door locks shall be recessed two minimize potential of damage to door/enclosure.

H. A duct between the radiator and air outlet shall be provide to prevent re-circulation of hot air.

I. The complete exhaust system shall be internal to the enclosure.

J. The critical silencer shall be fitted with a tailpipe and rain cap.

3213.13-2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
TP-81

A. Non-Conforming work.

1. To ensure that the equipment has been design and built to the highest reliability and quality standards, the manufacture and/or local representative shall be responsible for three separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests, and site tests.

2. Design Prototype test. Components of the emergency system, such as the engine/generator set, Transfer switch, and accessories, shall not be subjected to prototype tests because the tests are potentially damaging. Rather. Similar design prototypes and preproduction models shall be subject to the following tests:
a. Maximum power (KW)
B. Maximum motor starting (KVA) at 35% instantaneous voltage dip.

C. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and/or by resistance method per NEMA MG1-32.6
D. Governor speed regulation under stead-state and transient conditions.

E. Voltage regulation and generator transient response.

F. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor.

G. Three-phase short circuit tests.

H. Alternator cooling air flow.

I. Torsional analysi8s to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional stresses.

J. Endurance testing.

1. Final Production tests. Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include:
a. Single-step load pickup.
b. Safety shutdown device testing
c. Rated power @ 0.8 PF
d. Maximum power
e. Upon request, a witness test, or a certified test record sent prior to shipment.

2. Site tests. The manufacture’s distribution representative shall perform an installation check, startup, and building load test. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff Shall be notified of the time and date of the site tests. The tests shall include:
a. Single-step load pickup.
b. Safety shutdown device testing
c. Rated power @ 0.8 PF
d. Maximum power
e. Upon request, a witness test, or a certified test record sent prior to shipment shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper system coordination. Engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery charge level along with generator set voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test.
3213.13-PART 3 - EXECUTION

3213.13-3.1 INSTALLATION

TP-82

A. Interruption of Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to construction site unless permitted under the following conditions.

B. Notify Construction Manage no fewer than three working days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service with Construction Manager’s written permission.

C. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 404.

D. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers’ written installation and alignment instructions.

E. Equipment Mounting: Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for packaged engine generators. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirement are specified with concrete.

F. Install package engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch (25mm) on 4-inch- (100mm-) high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.

G. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

H. Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3213.13-3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.”.

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 “Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.” Provide a minimum of one 90- degree bend in flexible conduit routed to the engine generator from a stationary element.

C. Balance single- phase loads to obtain a maximum of 10 percent unbalance between any two phases.

3213.13-3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install a sign indicating the generator neutral is bonded to the main service neutral at the main servicer location.

3213.13-3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and Inspection.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative.

D. Retain test requirements below with any combination of paragraphs above. The following tests and inspections are derived from NETA Acceptance Testing Specification (ATS). Review NETA ATS and other standards listed and revise subparagraphs below.

E. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each visual and mechanical inspe4ction and electrical and mechanical test listed in first two subparagraphs below as specified in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

1. VISUAL AND MECHANICAL INSPECTION:

TP-83

a) Compare equipment nameplate date with Drawings and the Specifications. b) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c) Inspect anchorage, alignment and grounding.
d) Verify that the unit is clean.

2. ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL TESTS:

a) Perform insulation-resistance tests according to IEEE 43. b) Test protective relay devices.
c) Verify phase rotation, phasing and synchronized operation as required by the application.
d) Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, over temperature, overspeed, and other protection features as applicable. e) Perform vibration test for each main bearing cap.
f) Verify correct functioning of the governor and regulator.

3. BATTERY TESTS: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Record individual cell voltage.

a) Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full - charging and float -charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.
b) Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.
c) Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d) Verify that measurements are within manufacturer’s specifications. e) Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.
f) System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
g) Exhaust-System Back- Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg (120 kPa) Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold.

Verify that back pressure at full -rated load is within manufacturer’s written allowable limits for the engine.
h) Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. i) Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step- load increases and decreases and verify that performance is as specified. j) Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage at 25 and 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.
k) Noise Level Tests: Measure A -weighted level of noise emanating from engine generator installation, including engine exhaust and cooling- air intake and discharge, at 25 feet (8 m) from edge of the generator5 enclosure, and compare measured levels with required values.
l) Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. m) Test instruments shall have been calibrated with past 12 months, traceable to NIST Calibration Services, an adequate for making positive observation of test results.

Make calibration records available for examination on request. n) Leak Test: After installation, charge exhaust, coolant, and fuel systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
o) Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment.

TP-84

p) Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
q) Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. r) Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations, and retest unit specified requirements are met.
s) ‘Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay setting and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3213.13-3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain package engine generators.

SECTION 3600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES
3600-PART 1 GENERAL
3600-1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes automatic and nonautomatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less. 3600-1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, and installed features and devices.

2. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load.
3600-1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for transfer switches, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

B. Source quality control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.
3600-1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.

TP-85

3600-1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of transfer switch or transfer switch components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 3600-PART 2 PRODUCTS
3600-2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 99.

D. Comply with NFPA 110.

E. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

F. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Tested Fault -Current Closing and Short -Circuit Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault -current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

2. Short-time withstand capability for three cycles.

H. Repetitive Accuracy of Solid- State Controls: All settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

I. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage- surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.62. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

J. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric - motor-operated mechanism. Switches for emergency or standby purposes shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions to prevent simultaneous connection to both power sources unless closed transition.

K. Service-Rated Transfer Switch:

1. Comply with UL 869A and UL 489.

2. Provide terminals for bonding the grounding electrode conductor to the grounded service conductor.

3. In systems with a neutral, the bonding connection shall be on the neutral bus.

4. Provide removable link for temporary separation of the service and load grounded conductors.

5. Surge Protective Device: Service rated.

6. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1008 for normal and alternative buses.

TP-86

7. Service Disconnecting Means: Externally operated, manual mechanically actuated.

L. Neutral Switching: Where four -pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched simultaneously with phase poles.

M. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated unless otherwise indicated.

N. Oversize Neutral: Ampacity and switch rating of neutral path through units indicated for oversize neutral shall be double the nominal rating of circuit in which switch is installed.

O. Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries.

1. Float type, rated 10 A.

2. Ammeter to display charging current.

3. Fused ac inputs and dc outputs.

P. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable with printed, tape markers at terminations.

Color-coding and wire and cable markers are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field- Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

4. Accessible via front access.

Q. Enclosures: General -purpose NEMA 250, Type 3R, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.
3600-2.2 CONTACTOR-TYPE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers

1. Caterpillar, Inc

2. Cummins Power Generation

3. Eaton

4. GE Zenith Controls

5. Generac Power Systems

6. Kohler Power Systems
B. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

C. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous -duty repetitive transfer of full -rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded- case switches or circuit breakers or insulated- case circuit-breaker components are unacceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.

3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load -current switching. Contactor -style automatic transfer -switch units, rated 600 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

4. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

5. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

6. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

7. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

8. Ground bar.

9. Connectors shall be marked for conductor size and type according to UL 1008.

TP-87

D. Automatic Open-Transition Transfer Switches: Interlocked to prevent the load from being closed on both sources at the same time.

1. Sources shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent closing both sources on the load at the same time.

E. Automatic Delayed- Transition Transfer Switches: Pauses or stops in intermediate position to momentarily disconnect both sources, with transition controlled by programming in the automatic transfer-switch controller. Interlocked to prevent the load from being closed on both sources at the same time.

1. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal -source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals for alternative source. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

2. Sources shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent closing both sources on the load at the same time.

3. Fully automatic break-before-make operation with center off position.

4. Fully automatic break -before-make operation with transfer when two sources have near zero phase difference.

F. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval shall be adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

G. Automatic Transfer-Switch Controller Features:

1. Controller operates through a period of loss of control power.

2. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase- to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value.

Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal.

Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from zero to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes. Override shall automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.

6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer -switch normal - and emergency-source sensing circuits.
a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."
b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single- pole, double- throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source.

Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine- generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

TP-88

13. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid- state, programmable- time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool -down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods shall be adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings shall be for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:
a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer.
b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is unavailable.

H. Large-Motor-Load Power Transfer:

1. In-Phase Monitor: Factory -wired, internal relay controls transfer so contacts c lose only when the two sources are synchronized in phase and frequency. Relay shall compare phase relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiate transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer shall be initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

2. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay Controls: Designated starters in loss of power scenario shall disconnect motors before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer. Control connection to motor starters shall be through wiring external to automatic transfer switch. Provide adjustable time delay between 1 and 60 seconds for reconnecting individual motor loads. Provide relay contacts rated for motor -control circuit inrush and for actual seal currents to be encountered.

1. Caterpillar Inc

2. Cummins Power Generation

3. Eaton

4. GE Zenith Controls

5. Generac Power Systems

6. Kohler Power Systems
B. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

C. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous -duty repetitive transfer of full -rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using contactor-based components are unacceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.

3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching.

4. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

5. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

6. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

7. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

8. Ground bar.

9. Connectors shall be marked for conductor size and type according to UL 1008.

TP-89

D. Automatic Open-Transition Transfer Switches: Interlocked to prevent the load from being closed on both sources at the same time.

1. Sources shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent closing both sources on the load at the same time.

2. Sources shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent closing both sources on the load at the same time.

3. Fully automatic break-before-make operation with center off position.

4. Fully automatic break -before-make operation with transfer when two sources have near zero phase difference.

F. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval shall be adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

G. Transfer Switches Based on Molded- Case-Switch Components: Comply with UL 489 and UL 869A.

H. Automatic Transfer-Switch Controller Features:

1. Controller operates through a period of loss of control power.

2. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal and Alternative Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.

6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single- pole, double- throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

TP-90

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

I. Large-Motor-Load Power Transfer:

3. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator with programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Adjustable pause from 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum, and factory set for 0.5 second unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Disable pause unless both sources are live. 3600-2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment according to UL 1008. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

1. For each of the tests required by UL 1008, performed on representative devices, for emergency and optional stand- by systems. Include results of test for the following conditions:
a. Overvoltage.
b. Undervoltage.
c. Loss of supply voltage.
d. Reduction of supply voltage.
e. Alternative supply voltage or frequency is at minimum acceptable values. f. Temperature rise.

TP-91

g. Dielectric voltage-withstand; before and after short-circuit test. h. Overload.
i. Contact opening.
j. Endurance.
k. Short circuit.
l. Short-time current capability.
m. Receptacle withstand capability.
n. Insulating base and supports damage.
3600-PART 3 EXECUTION
3600-3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Install transfer switches on cast -in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in- Place Concrete.”

2. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices specified in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

3. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

4. Provide workspace and clearances required by NFPA 70.

B. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall unless otherwise indicated.

C. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

E. Comply with NECA 1.
3600-3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to generator sets, motor controls, control, and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within electrical enclosures.

Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
E. Connect twisted pair cable according to Section 260523 "Control -Voltage Electrical Power Cables."
F. Connect twisted pair cable according to Section 271513 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling."
TP-92

G. Route and brace conductors according to manufacturer's written instructions and Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Do not obscure manufacturer's markings and labels.

H. Final connections to equipment shall be made with liquidtight, flexible metallic conduit no more than 18 inches (457 mm) in length.
3600-3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory -authorized service representative:

1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean.
e. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current -carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces.
f. Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible. g. Verify tightness of all control connections.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods, or both:
1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data. i. Perform manual transfer operation.
j. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate sources. k. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters. l. Inspect control power transformers.
1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition. 2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit -breaker ratings match Drawings.
3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting contacts, grounding contacts, and interlocks.

2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. b. Perform a contact/pole- resistance test. Compare measured values with manufacturer's acceptable values.
c. Verify settings and operation of control devices.
d. Calibrate and set all relays and timers.

TP-93

e. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation. f. Perform automatic transfer tests.
g. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions:
1) Normal source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays. 2) Engine start sequence.
3) Time delay on transfer.
4) Alternative source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays. 5) Automatic transfer operation.
6) Interlocks and limit switch function.
7) Time delay and retransfer on normal power restoration. 8) Engine cool-down and shutdown feature.

3. Measure insulation resistance phase- to-phase and phase- to-ground with insulation- resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.
a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features.
c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, perform each electrical test for transfer switches stated in NETA ATS and demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and retransfer from emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings.
d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings.
e. Perform contact -resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for one pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.
f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool - down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground -fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.
a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

D. Transfer switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

TP-94
G. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or t o det
ect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

2. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches check ed and t
hat describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3. Follow -up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 m
onths after date of Substantial Completion.
3600-3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory -authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment.

B. Training shall include testing ground-fault protective devices and instructions to determine whe n t
he ground- fault system shall be retested. Include instructions on where ground -fault sensors are located and how to avoid negating the ground- fault protection scheme during testing and circuit modifications.

C. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.

E
nd of Technical Provisions
Version 2.06
Smart EV Charging
Noodoe EV AC19L
Width

10.6 in / 270 mm
Height

14.1 in / 360 mm
Depth

5.5 in / 140 mm

SPECIFICATIONS
Cloud service
Maximum output power
Output power
Vehicle connector
Charging cable length
Input power
Grounding system
Efficiency
Power factor
Display
Communication protocol
Network connectivity
NEMA enclosures(NEMA)
Impact protection
Electrical protection
Operating temperature
Dimensions
Weight
Certifications
Noodoe EV OS

19.2 kW
80 A @200~240 Vac, 1-phase
SAE J1772
25 feet / 7.6 m
1-phase, 3-wire, 200~240 Vac, 80 A maximum
TN, TT
> 99%
> 0.99
LED indicator, OLED, 20 characters, 2 lines
OCPP 1.6 JSON
Ethernet, Wi-Fi
NEMA 3R
IK10
Over voltage protection, under voltage protection,
surge protection, ground fault protection,
residual current device, short circuit protection,
over current protection, over temperature protection
-31 °F to +131 °F / -35 °C to +55 °C

10.6 (W) x 14.1 (H) x 5.5 (D) in
270 (W) x 360 (H) x 140 (D) mm

27.4 lbs / 12.4 kg
UL, FCC, Energy Star
Noodoe Inc.
9896 Bissonnet,
Suite 440
Houston, TX 7703,
United States
+1 281-888-3429
[email protected]
noodoe.com
Noodoe EV OS

Tel.: 310.782.1410 * 2377 Crenshaw Bl. * Suite 310 * Torrance, CA 90501 www.mep-llc.com

ENGINEERING SERVICES PROPOSAL

Date: November 5, 2025

MEP Project No. 25-087

Site: City of Gardena City Hall building, located at 1700 W 162nd St, Gardena, CA 90247 and Police Department building, located at 1718 W 162nd St, Gardena, CA 90247.

Project: Electrical engineering design “Construction Documents (CD) for Bid Set” to segregate electrical service for the City Hall from the PD building, including emergency power design and connections, and power integration for new EV (electric vehicle) charging station.

Proposed Scope
Of Work: Add construction assistance/construction support services during construction/ SCE coordination phase: Contractor RFI/RFC responses, shop drawing reviews, on-site construction progress inspections, SCE on site meetings, SCE review site plans, final project inspection with punch list, record plans.

Proposed Cost: Construction assistance/construction support services 40-Hrs EE, PE x 235: $ 9,400

Design Team: Project team will include Roy Lee, PE (Electrical Engineering) and Glenn R. Tanner, PE (Principal MEP Engineer).

Thank you again for contacting MAXIMUM ENERGY PROFESSIONALS and we look forward to working with you on this and other mechanical / HVAC – energy conservation – electrical – plumbing design projects. If you have any questions, please feel free to call me at any time.

Thank you !!!, Sincerely …

Glenn R. Tanner, PE (CA, UT, OK, AZ, NV, TX)
Principal Engineer

MAXIMUM ENERGY PROFESSIONALS
2377 Crenshaw Blvd. Suite 310, Torrance CA 90501
(310) 782-1410 Tel. (310) 782-0031 Fax
www.mep-llc.com
[email protected]

City of Gardena
Gardena City Council
Meeting

AGENDA REPORT

SUMMARY

Agenda Item No. 17B.

Section: DEPARTMENTAL

ITEMS - PUBLIC WORKS
Meeting Date: November
18, 2025

TO: THE HONORABLE MAYOR AND MEMBERS OF THE GARDENA CITY COUNCIL AGENDA TITLE: Award the Gardena Community Aquatic and Senior Center Pool Maintenance Services Contract to Sea Clear Pools Inc., in the amount of $339,960, Approve 10% Contingency and Declare California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) Exemption
COUNCIL ACTION REQUIRED:

Staff Recommendation:

Award Aquatic Pool Maintenance Service Contract
Approve 10% Contingency
Declare CEQA Exemption
RECOMMENDATION AND STAFF SUMMARY:

In preparation for the opening of the Gardena Community Aquatic and Senior Center, a Request for Proposals (RFP) was solicited in October 2025 for the Swimming Pool Maintenance Services. The pool will be open year-round.

Therefore, the pool maintenance will occur three (3) times per week from June to August and two (2) times per week from September to May. Additionally, during the ﬁrst 90 days after opening, the pool will be vacuumed daily to remove construction residues, maintain proper water balance and protect the new equipment.

The RFP was advertised on CR Planwell and the City website. Four (4) companies attended the mandatory Pre- Submittal meeting. Attendance was required in order to submit a proposal. On November 6, 2025, two (2) proposals were received. Of the two (2) proposals received, one (1) proposal from Paradise Pools and Spa was deemed non-responsive for missing documentation. Therefore, there was only one (1) viable proposal from Sea Clear Pools, Inc.

Organization Year-1 Year-2(Optional)Year-3(Optional) Total Sea Clear Pools, Inc.$121,000$105,820$113,140 $339,960
Paradise Pools &Spa, Inc. $126,150$108,720$117,200 $352,070Non-responsiveWaterlineTechnologies, Inc. Non-responsive Hasa, Inc. DQ - Withdrew
Sea Clear Pools, based in Torrance, has met all the requirements with veriﬁed references, and competitive bid prices. They are licensed by the Los Angeles County Department of Environmental Health and have over 36 years of experience and provides service to other local municipalities.

Staff respectfully recommends that the City Council award the Gardena Community Aquatic and Senior Center Pool Maintenance Services Contract to Sea Clear Pools, Inc., in the amount of $121,000, for a duration of one year, with an option for staff to extend the contract for up to two years in the amount of $218,960 if the contractor’s performance is satisfactory for a grand total of $339,960. Additionally, staff recommends to:

A. Approve an annual 10% contingency for unforeseen conditions.

B. Declare this contract to be categorically exempt under CEQA, Article 19, Section 15301, Class I, as a maintenance services.

FISCAL IMPACT/COST:

Contract Term: Annual Cost10% ContingencyTotal
Year-1 $121,000 $12,100 $133,100Year-2Optional $105,820 $10,582 $116,402 Year-3Optional $113,140 $11,314 $124,454
3-Year Total $339,960 $33,996 $373,956
Funding Source: General Fund

APPROVED:
___________________________
Clint Osorio, City Manager
Attachments
Request for Proposal_Pool Maintenance Services
Sea Clea Pools Proposal.pdf

CITY OF GARDENA

REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS

FOR

GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC & SENIOR CENTER

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE SERVICES

OCTOBER 2025

NOTICE INVITING PROPOSALS
City of Gardena, California
Notice is hereby given that the City of Gardena is soliciting proposals/bids (Deliver, Mail, or Email) at the office of the Public Works Department – 1717 W. 162 nd Street, Gardena, California, 90247 or [email protected] (Attn: Hong Lee), until 2 PM on Thursday, November 6, 2025, for:

CONTRACT: GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER SWIMMING

POOL MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You may access the specifications and invitation through the following platforms:
https://cityofgardena.org/rfps/ or https://www.e-arc.com/location/costa-mesa/ PRE-SUBMITTAL MEETING AND SITE VISIT:

The City intends to hold a MANDATORY pre-submittal meeting and site visit to provide an opportunity for Contractors to ask questions and see the equipment and systems under consideration of the Request for Proposals. If you attended the previous pre-submittal meeting from the July or September 2025 Notice of Inviting Proposal, you are NOT required to attend the additional mandatory job walk.

Due to the active construction, proper PPE is required including hard hat, safety vest and work boot.

Date: Monday, October 27, 2025

Time: 12 PM

Location: Gardena Aquatic and Senior Center, 1654 W 160 th Street, Gardena, CA 90247

All questions shall be submitted via email to Hong Lee, Contract Administrator, at [email protected], no later than Thursday, October 30, 2025.

Any bid received after the hour stated above for any reason whatsoever, will be considered non-responsive and disqualified. The City reserves the right to withdraw or cancel this Notice Inviting Proposal/Bids at any time without prior notification, and the City makes no representations that any contract will be awarded to any Contractor responding to the notice.

The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any information or irregularity in any bid received and to be the sole judge of the merits of the respective bids received.

The award, if made, will be made based on the Best Value (taking into consideration qualifications, experience, and costs).

ABSTRACT
The City of Gardena is in the South Bay Area of Los Angeles County. It is a modestly sized

City with an area of 6.2 square miles and a population of 60,000 residents. The Public Works Department has a need to service and maintain the newly constructed swimming pool for the Aquatic and Senior Center that is scheduled to open at the end of 2025 to early 2026.

The City of Gardena is seeking assistance by augmenting its current work force with a one (1) year maintenance for the Gardena Community Aquatic and Senior Center’s Swimming Pool and may be extended up to two (2) additional years for good performance.

SCOPE OF WORK
The City of Gardena is seeking proposals/ bids from qualified Los Angeles County Department of Environmental Health (LACDEH) licensed pool maintenance Contractors to provide routine maintenance for the new commercial swimming pool. The pool facility is tentatively scheduled to be open from 8 AM to 8 PM year-round.

The contractor shall furnish all materials, labor, and equipment required for full-Service Pool Maintenance. Contractor shall provide comprehensive pool program and experience with pool maintenance programs related. Include the range of tasks and services provided by your company. Refer to scoring criteria.

The brand-new constructed swimming pool is approximately 7,020 square feet, 264,000 gallons and includes a 25- yard, up to 10 feet deep, 8 -lane lap section, a 3/4 -meter diving stand, anchor and board and connected learner/fitness pool with ADA ramp. The swimming pool maintenance w ill occur multiple times per week . Services will include preventive maintenance and equipment maintenance. On-call responses are required on an as needed basis.

The GREENBOOK 2021 General Provisions shall be implemented in case of any conflict, and this RFP shall take precedence over.

Contractors are required to follow all the California Code of Regulations related to this contract including but not limited to Cal. Code Regs. Title 2265535 - Public Pool Site Maintenance.

Gardena Community Aquatic and Senior Center – 1654 W 160 th Street, Gardena, CA
90247

CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

• Physical On-Site Visit
o Contractor shall provide and schedule licensed LACDEH swimming pool technicians for physical routine site visits.
• Pool Technicians
o Contractor will have at least three (3) Pool Technicians that have their LACDEH swimming pool technician license with a minimum of three (3) year experience servicing pools of the same size. Copy of the license will be provided to the City with the Request for Proposals/Bids and during duration of the contract upon expiration.

o In addition to submitting the name, biography and LACDEH license for all technicians with the proposal, if there are any updates to Pool Technicians, submit the updated name, biography, experience and LACDEH license to the City for review before technician begins servicing the pool. o Employee will be dressed professionally with company marked uniforms. • Hours of Service
o Service will be performed three (3) times per week from June to August and two (2) times per week from September to May. Service per week is subject to change depending on demand and use of the pool.
o Service visits will be from 6 AM to 8 AM before the pool opens for the public, Monday through Friday.
o During the first 90 days after the newly constructed Gardena Community Aquatic and Senior Center is accepted by the City, the Contractor will provide daily maintenance on the entire pool mechanical system and vacuum the pool. After operating the pool, if it is determined daily vacuuming is no longer necessary, the frequency will be reduced.
o The Ultramax robotic vacuum that is manufactured by Aquabot is intended to be dropped in the pool and removed when completed in approximately one (1) to three (3) hours.
• Scheduled Pool Maintenance Visit
o Start up and calibrate pool controller.
o Achieve water balance (alkalinity/calcium hardness/pH). o Achieve water clarity (metal out/water clarifier).
o Brush pool surfaces.
o Ensure pool reached chlorine and pH balances for opening inspection. o Fill pools to appropriate levels.
o Vacuum pool to desired cleanliness.
o Wash, clean, apply protectant to exterior of slides’ plastic/fiberglass fixtures. o Adjust variable drive pumps needed.
• Water Management
o Maintain proper water chemistry:
 Test pH, Chlorine, Calcium, Alkalinity and Stabilizer levels.  Load chemical feeders and add calcium, bi-carb and other chemicals to pool as needed.
 Program, calibrate and clean chemical automation systems as needed.
o Clean pump strainer baskets each trip or as needed.
o Backwash filter systems as needed.
o Clean pool skimmer baskets each trip or as needed.
• Chemical Requirements
o Contractor will provide all chemicals. Awarded Contractor must supply all chemicals to maintain a proper pool water balance. Adequate supplies must be on hand, so chemical requirements are always able to be fulfilled. o Contractor must maintain more than one chemical supplier to ensure the contractor has adequate stock or access to always required chemical supplies.
o Maintain sufficient inventory of pool chemicals.

o Contractor will have limited space in the Equipment Room to store supplies. o Chemicals will need to be filled with a hose from the street on La Salle Avenue. Chlorine must be pre-diluted off site. Diluting on site is prohibited o The time frame to deliver pool supplies will be between 7:30 AM to 5 PM.

The entrance is on La Salle Avenue.
o Each pool facility must have a secondary chlorine container on site to treat the pool in case of a fecal accident.
o Provide complete domestic water analysis to determine quantities and types of chemicals necessary to maintain pool water within the following levels:
 pH: 7.2 to 7.6
 Alkalinity: 80 to 100 ppm
 Calcium hardness: 200 to 400 ppm
 Chlorine: 1.5 to 2.0 ppm
 Total dissolved solids: 300 to 1,000 ppm
o Contractor shall submit receipts with the monthly invoice for reimbursable chemical expenses with a 15% markup for all administrative fees. Refer to bid schedule for established allowance amount. Any additional overage or expenses will need a change order and require City’s pre-approval.
• Logbook
o Two (2) logbooks are required to be maintained by the Contractor . The template for both logbooks must be pre-approved by the City. LACDEH must be able to access these logbooks at any time, any day of the week.  Logbook #1 - The physical book must include pool water test readings, cleaning of pump baskets, backwash of filters and chemical use, recommended repairs, as well as any other pertinent information. This will include the LACDEH form. This logbook must always remain at the pool location and stored in the Equipment Room.
 Logbook #2 – This logbook will be electronic and shall be supplied by the Contractor. This logbook must be available to the City to view any time.
• Reports
o Maintain and submit reports to the County of Los Angeles and any other agency as required.
• Eyewash Stations
o There are two (2) eyewash stations in the chemical rooms. • Automatic System
o Contractor is required to have an automatic system that continuously monitors the pool and sends alerts on the status of all systems. Contractor will keep electronic logs and notify the City’s Park Maintenance Lead immediately of any issues. Issues will be addressed within 90-minutes. • Emergency Services
o Contractor is required to provide troubleshooting and the expertise to fix existing equipment if the need arises. Provide a phone number that will be responded to at all hours, at any time of day and any day of the week. The call back should be less than 20 minutes. A 90- minute in-person response time is required under emergency circumstances.

o Emergency services will be an additional expense outside of the contract.

Contractor shall provide Fee Schedule for non- exclusive emergency/call out services.
o Provide telephone consultation, as needed, for any water clarity, water chemistry and/or mechanical issues that may arise.
• Subcontractor
o Contractor shall NOT sub-contract any of the basic maintenance functions. o Should any service require a repair or replacement outside of the scope of the standard services required in this Request for Proposals/Bids, only then will subcontracting or third-party services be acceptable. This must be pre - approved by the City.
o The Contractor shall identify the fixed markup percent, if any, in response to this Request for Proposals/Bids and will be required to submit the subcontractor’s invoices when non- standard services are provided to the City.
• Training
o Contractor’s LACDEH Swimming Pool Technicians are required to attend an operational training by the General Contractor once the Gardena Community Aquatic and Senior Center pool is completed and accepted by the City. This training will take place after the Contractor is awarded. o Provide annual operations training to City Staff as directed. • Pool Controller
o There will be no offsite access to the pool controller. The contractor will not be able to install their own monitoring system that works outside of the City’s internet connection/firewall.
• Equipment List
o The Contractor and its employees must have programming knowledge of the same systems in use at the City’s swimming pools. Below is the list of equipment.
 Circulation Pump-20 HP, 480V, 3 ɸ, 1,760 RPM W/850 GPM, 65’, 5”x4”, Paco #40957
 Filter System - 700 SF, Perlite Media, Fiberglass Tank, 120V Controller
 Heater-1,500,000 BTU W/120V,1 ɸ Pumps,360 GPM, Raypak Xtherm Indirect #1505a (TYP 2)
 Chemical Controller and Sensor Cell – 120V, 1ɸ, Chemtrol #PC3000  Chlorine Pump – 120 GPD, 120V, 1ɸ, Stenner #170dm4
 Chlorine Storage Tank – 500-gallon double wall W/16” non-vented manway, chem-tainer
 Acid Pump – 85GPD, 120V, 1ɸ, Stenner #85M5
 Acid Storage Tank – 350-gallon double wall w /16” non-vented manway, chem-tainer
 Variable Frequency Drive- 480V, 20 HP w/fused disconnected, Pentair ACU drive XS
 UV S ystem-566 GPM capacity , 1.28 KW,240V, 1ɸ , P entair 3 CLP64A8-XN
 Strainer-10”X10” Fiberglass w/SST Basket, Aquify # STR-1010-FRP

 Precoat Tee-10”X5’X4’ eccentric fiberglass tee w /10” check valve, Aquify #Tee-1005
 Concentric Reducer 8”x4” fiberglass, Aquify # RDC-0804-FRP  Heater Flow Meter – 6” Digital Pipe Mont Meter & Sensor for 360 GPM, Signet #8150
 Chemical Bypass Flow Meter – 3” Digital Wall Mont Meter & Sensor for 100 GPM
 UV Flow Meter – 6” Digital pipe mont meter & sensor for 550 GPM, signet 38150& 515
 Air Compressor – HP, 120V,1ɸ,20-gal tank, Ingersoll Rand #P1.51U- A9

PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
• Bi-Annual Scope of Work
o Inspect and if needed, rebuild all the chemical injection pumps or replace them if needed.
o Inspect and if needed, replace all chemical injection tubing with proper high pressure Polyethylene tubing using proper non -corrosive high- pressure fittings.
o Inspect surge pit including water level controls and tightening modulating float systems as needed.
o Maintenance on automated chemical control systems, the chlorine and acid systems, the pool water autofill systems and other ancillary systems; and Maintenance of pool heaters.
• Annual Scope of Work
o Open and inspect filter media.
o Replace all tubing not listed in the bi-annual checks on all chemical, sample stream and filter systems.
o Replace the pool water level controls if needed.
o Rebuild the pool water diaphragm fill valve; and
o Rebuild any filter tank backwash valves as needed.
• Heater Maintenance Service
o The heater maintenance work includes, but is not limited to all ongoing services, parts, materials and sales tax needed to maintain all pool heater.

Heater must always be kept in good working order. Pool technicians must have sufficient training to maintai n the Heater -1,500,000 BTU W/120V,1 ɸ PUMPS,360 GPM, RAYPAK XTHERM INDIRECT #1505a (TYP 2). Heater maintenance service will include but not limited to the flowing:
o Complete cleaning and service every six (6) months (as listed in the O&M manual for complete heater service). Includes all the parts needed such as ignitors, gaskets, sensors
o Check and replenish the condensate neutralizer every six (6) months. o Work directly with City for warrantee items or extended warranty items. o Check rooftop exhaust venting annually and secure as needed.

REQUIRED ATTACHMENT

Summarize on a separate sheet the specific tasks to be performed by the technician each week per the provisions of routine maintenance, noting other maintenance performed at other intervals (i.e., six months). This will be used as an exhibit in the contract.

TERMINATION OF SERVICES

The City reserves the right to cancel the Agreement at any time due to nonperformance.

SELECTION OF CONTRACTOR
In selecting the Best Value bidder, consideration will be given to the general competency of the bidder for the performance of the work covered by the bid proposal. To receive favorable consideration, a bidder may be required to present evidence that he has successfully performed similar work of comparable magnitude or submit other satisfactory evidence to the Agency that he or his associates are competent to manage the proposed undertaking and to carry it forward to a successful conclusion. Professional integrity and honesty of purpose shall be essential requirements. A showing of adequate financial resources may be required, but will not alone determine whether a bidder is competent to undertake the proposed work.

Evaluation Criteria

Award will be based upon a review and evaluation by a committee designated by the Public Works. Each proposal will be evaluated based on the following criteria but not limited to. • General Approach to meet the requirements of the specified City objectives described in the Request for Proposals/Bids.
• Qualifications and Experience of the LACEDH Pool Technicians and other key individuals. • Contractor’s Past Performance on projects of similar size and scope. • Work Plan. Depth of proposer’s understanding of City’s requirements and overall quality of work plan and clarity. Understanding of complying with all County health regulations. • Cost & Price . Reasonableness of rates; competitiveness with other offers received; adequacy of data in support of figures quoted.

Criteria Maximum Score
General Approach 5
Qualifications and Experience 20
Contractor’s Past Performance 20
Work Plan 5
Cost & Price 50
TOTAL SCORE 100

Interviews
If interviews are needed, a few days’ notice will be sent via email to the proposer. An interview may not be required or needed to award a contract.

Tentative Schedule

Date Event
November 18, 2025 City Council Award Contract to Best Value Bidder
November 19, 2025 Bid Acceptance Letter and Contract
Document Sent to Contractor
November 29, 2025 Contractor to Execute and Return Contract Documents including Certificate of Insurance
to the City within 10 calendar days
To be determined by
the City
Notice to Proceed/Start Pool Maintenance
Services

Evaluation Procedure
An evaluation committee will be appointed to review all proposals received for this Request for Proposals/Bids. The committee is comprised of City staff and may include outside personnel.

Committee members will evaluate the written proposals using evaluation criteria identified.

A list of top-ranked proposals, firms within a competitive range, will be developed based upon the totals of each committee members’ score for each proposal.

During the evaluation period, the City may interview some or all of the proposing firms if deemed necessary.

No other interview dates will be provided, therefore, if a Proposer is unable to attend the interview on selected date(s), its proposal may be eliminated from further discussion.

The interview may consist of a short presentation by the Proposer after which the evaluation committee will ask questions related to the firm’s proposal and qualifications.

At the conclusion of this interview process, the evaluation committee will provide a recommendation for award. The proposer being recommended will receive a notice of intent to award, pending successful negotiations and contract preparation.

Upon successful completion of this process, a recommendation will be made to the City Council, based on the contract, for their review and consent. All unsuccessful firms will be notified at that time.

Notification of Awards
The successful proposer will be required to execute a Contract agreement, with the City, which is subject to formal approval by the Gardena City Council. The proposer will also be required to purchase a City Business License annually during the duration of the contract.

TERM OF AGREEMENT

The term of this Agreement shall be one (1) year commencing on the date a Notice to proceed is issued by the City’s representative and may be extended up to two (2) additional years for good performance.

PAYMENT

The contract shall begin per the City’s written notification. The Contract is for a period of one (1) year of routine maintenance services with the option for contract extension of up to two (2) years as approved by the Director or Public Works.

Invoices shall be submitted on a monthly basis by the 15th of the following month along with a copy of the log report and receipt for chemical materials purchased and utilized, to document the services completed. Once the City confirm the work is verified and completed, the invoice shall be processed at the following Council Meeting. The City Council meets twice a month on the second and fourth Tuesday.

Work must be completed within the working days specified in the schedule provided for the various maintenance activities, and the Contractor shall notify the City 24 hours in advance of the actual commencement of work.

No work shall be undertaken during the City’s holiday closures. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to determine the City’s closure dates.

Bidders are advised that this Project is a public work for purposes of the California Labor Code, which requires payment of prevailing wages. Accordingly, the bidder awarded the Contract shall be required to pay not less than the prevailing rate of per diem wages, as determined by the Director of the California Department of Industrial Relations, and otherwise comply with the provisions of Section 1770 et seq. of the California Labor Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 16000 et seq., and any other applicable laws, rules and regulations adopted with respect thereto (“California Prevailing Wage Laws”). Copies of such prevailing rates of per diem wages are on file at the Gardena City Clerk’s office and the office of the City Engineer, and copies shall be made available to any interested party on request. The prevailing rates of per diem wages referred to herein are hereby made a part of this Notice by reference.

Attention is directed to the provisions of Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 of the Labor Code concerning the employment of apprentices by Contractor. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of said sections in the employment of apprentices.

These requirements will apply to all public works projects that are subject to the prevailing wage requirements of the Labor Code without regard to funding source.

The State General Prevailing Wage Determination is established by the California Department of Industrial Relations (available at http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD/index.htm).Skilled and Trained Workforce: This project is subject to Skilled and Trained Workforce Requirements per Sections 2600 through 2603 of the Public Contract Code.

ITEMS TO BE SUBMITTED (BID PROPOSAL):

Bidder MUST complete and return the forms below in its entirety for consideration of their proposal. Incomplete proposals will not be accepted.

A. Bid Schedule including pricing for up to two (2) optional years of maintenance service.

B. Acknowledgement of Addenda Received

C. Bidders Declaration

D. Non-Collusion Affidavit

E. Declaration of Eligibility to Contract

ADDITIONAL ITEMS TO BE SUBMITTED:

Bidder must also submit the following items in its entirety for consideration of their proposal.

Incomplete items below will negatively impact the rating score.

A. Construction Project References

B. Certificate of Non-Discrimination by Contractors

C. Certification Regarding Debarment, suspension, Inability and Voluntary Exclusion Primary Covered Transactions

D. Name, biography, experience and LACDEH license of all staff.

E. Summarize on a separate sheet the specific tasks to be performed by the technician each week per the provisions of routine maintenance, noting other maintenance performed at other intervals (i.e., six months).

F. Provide Fee Schedule for non-exclusive emergency/call out services.

CONTRACT DOCUMENT (CD): (to be submitted AFTER award of contract)

A. Agreement

B. Worker’s Compensation Insurance Certificate

C. Indemnification and Hold Harmless Agreement and Waiver of Subrogation and Contribution

D. Insurance

T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S

GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE SERVICES

DESCRIPTION PAGE
Title Page ................................................................ .

Notice Inviting Bids ...................................................

Location Map ............................................................

Table of Contents ..................................................... i Instructions to Bidders .............................................. ii-iv

BID PROPOSAL (To Be Submitted with Proposal)
Bid Schedule ............................................................ BP-2 Acknowledgement of Addenda Received ................. BP-5 Bidder’s Declaration ................................................. BP-6 Non-collision Affidavit ............................................... BP-8 Declaration of Eligibility to Contract .......................... BP-9 Construction Project Reference ................................ BP-10 Certificate of Non-Discrimination by Contractors....... BP-11 Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension,
Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion –
Primary Covered Transition ................................ . BP-12

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (To Be Submitted after Award)
Agreement ............................................................... CD-2 Workers’ Compensation Insurance Certificate .......... CD-4 Indemnification and Hold Harmless Agreement
Of Subrogation and Contribution .............................. CD-5 Insurance ................................................................. CD-6 i.

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

FORM OF PROPOSAL
The Proposal shall be fully executed and submitted on the forms in the project specifications and shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope marked and addressed or emailed as directed in the Notice Inviting Bids.

PROPOSAL / BID DOCUMENTS
A
ll Proposals shall include the following executed documents to be submitted with each bid:

Bidding Schedule
Acknowledgement of Addenda Received
Bidder's Declaration
Non-Collusion Affidavit
D
eclaration of Eligibility of Contract
Construction Project Reference
Certificate of Non-Discrimination by Contractors
Certification of Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – Primary Covered Transitions

DELIVERY OF PROPOSAL
The P
roposal shall be delivered by the time stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids. It is the bidder's sole responsibility to see that its Proposal is received as stipulated. Any Proposal received after the scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals will be returned to the bidder.

WITHDRAWAL OF PROPOSAL
The P
roposal may be withdrawn by the bidder by means of a written request, signed by the bidder or its properly authorized representative. Such written request must be notified via email or delivered to the place stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids for receipt of proposals prior to the scheduled closing time for receipt of proposals. No Proposal may be withdrawn after the hour fixed for opening bids.

MODIFICATIONS AND ALTERNATIVE PROPOSALS
U
nauthorized conditions, limitations, or provisions attached to the Proposal will render it informal and may be grounds for its rejection as non-responsive. The completed Proposal forms shall be without interlineations, alterations, or erasures. Alternative proposals will not be considered ii.
unless specifically requested. Oral, telegraphic, or telephonic proposals or modifications will not be considered.

DISCREPANCIES IN PROPOSALS
In the event there is more than one bid item in a Bidding Schedule, the bidder shall furnish a price for all bid items in the Schedule, and failure to do so will render the Proposal informal and may be grounds for its rejection as non- responsive. The bidder shall state in words and figures the unit prices or the specific sums as the case may be, for which it proposes to supply the labor, materials, supplies, or machinery, and completely perform the Contract. The total amount of each item bid and the total amount of the bid shall be stated in words and figures.

I
n case of any discrepancy between the words and the figures, the words shall prevail. If the unit price and the total amount named by a bidder for any items are not in agreement, the unit price alone will be considered as representing the bidder's intention and the total will be corrected to conform thereto.

DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS
A per
son, firm, or corporation shall NOT be allowed to make or file, or be interested in more than one bid, except an alternative bid when specifically requested; provided, however, a person, firm, or corporation who has submitted a sub-proposal to a bidder submitting a Proposal, or who has quoted prices on materials to such bidders, is not thereby disqualified from submitting a sub-proposal or from quoting prices to other bidders submitting proposals, or from submitting a Proposal as a prime contractor. Similarly, failure to comply with the registration requirements of Labor Code Section 1725.5, as further described in the Notice Inviting Bids, will disqualify a bidder.
iii.

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
C
ontract Documents are to be submitted within ten ( 10) calendar days AFTER award of the contract. Unless extended by agreement of the City, failure to timely submit executed Contract Documents may be grounds for rejecting the bid award and forfeiture of the bid security. See enclosed documents commencing on page CD-1.
iv.

BP-1

BID PROPOSAL (BP)

GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE SERVICES
Contractor:

Address:

Phone:

Fax:

License No.:

Email:

To Be Submitted
WITH
Bid Package

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL

BP-2

BID PROPOSAL

BID SCHEDULE

The undersigned, having examined the proposed Contract Documents titled:

GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE SERVICES

and having visited the site and examined the conditions affecting the work, hereby proposes and agrees to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and appliances, and to perform operations necessary to complete the work as required by said proposed Contrac t Documents and itemized bid schedule below. All routine work shall be performed two (2) times per week from June to August and three (3) times per week from September to May. City’s fiscal year begins on July 1st and ends on June 30th.

Year One
Item 1 Item Description Number of Pool
Service Visit
Unit Price
(Price Per
Service Visit)
Total Price
1 Pool Maintenance Service from June to August 36 $ $ 2 Pool Maintenance service from September to May 80 $ $ 3 Daily cleaning of pool for first 90 days as needed 90 $ $ 4 Chemical Allowance 1 LS $55,000
Year One (1)
Grand Total
$

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL

BP-3
Year Two (Optional)
Item 1 Item Description Number of
Pool Service
Visit
Unit Price
(Price Per
Service Visit)
Total Price
1 Pool Maintenance service from June to August 36 $ $ 2 Pool Maintenance service from September to May 80 $ $ 3 Chemical Allowance 1 LS $60,000
Year Two (2)
Grand Total
$

Year Three (Optional)
Item 1 Item Description Number of Pool
Service Visit
Unit Price
(Price Per
Service Visit)
Total Price
1 Pool Maintenance Service from June to August 36 $ $ 2 Pool Maintenance Service from September to May 80 $ $ 3 Chemical Allowance 1 LS $65,000
Year Three (3)
Grand Total
$

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL

BP-4
1-Year Grand Total

2-Year Optional Grand Total

Year 2
Year 3
TWO (2) YEAR OPTIONAL GRAND TOTAL

**In the event there is an error in the Bid Schedule with extending a price into the total price column, the unit price will govern.

The Contract term is for a period of one (1) year, 12 months with up to two (2) years, 24 months optional extension.

The Proposer shall provide Fee Schedule for non-exclusive emergency/call out services.

All work required and shown on the construction plans and this specification, for which no price or item is listed on this proposal, it shall be understood that such work, equipment, labor, tools and materials shall be provided without extra charge, allowance or direct payment of any kind. Payment for performing such work or furnishing such equipment, labor, tools and materials shall be included in the above lump sum or unit bid prices and no additional compensation will be paid therefor.

The City will award the contract based on the Best Value (taking into consideration qualifications, experience, and costs).

Name of Bidder Signature of Bidder Date

Year 1
ONE (1) YEAR GRAND TOTAL

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-5

BID PROPOSAL

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA RECEIVED

The Bidder shall acknowledge the receipt of addenda by number and date each addendum received.

Addendum No.

Date
Date
Addendum No.

Addendum No.

Date
Date
Addendum No. Date Addendum No. Date

Addenda will be issued through the Arc Solution California (https://www.e-arc.com/location/costa- mesa/) and City Website (https://cityofgardena.org/rfps/). It is the Bidder’s sole responsibility to visit these platforms to obtain and administer any Addendum related to this bid. An Addendum must be acknowledged above by a bidder in its submitted form of Proposal.

If an addendum or addenda have been issued by the City and not noted above as being received by the Bidder, the Bid Proposal may be rejected.

Bidder’s Signature Date

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-6

BIDDER'S DECLARATION

It is understood and agreed that:

1. The undersigned has carefully examined all documents which will form a part of the Contract; namely, the Notice Inviting Bids, the Instructions to Bidders, this Proposal, the federal requirements, if any, the Plans and Specifications, the Special Provisions, and the Technical Provisions.

3. The undersigned fully understands the scope of work and has carefully checked all words and figures inserted in this Proposal and further understands that the City will not be responsible for any errors or omissions in the preparation of the Proposal.

4. The undersigned agrees and acknowledges that he is aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which requires every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that Code, and that the undersigned will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the Contract if it is awarded to the undersigned.

The undersigned will execute the Contract and certificates of insurance within the period of time specified in the Contract Documents.

The undersigned will begin work after award of Contract and a Notice to Proceed has been given as herein specified and will complete said work within the time specified in the Bidding Schedule.

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-7

BIDDER'S DECLARATION (Continued)

7. The undersigned bidder stated under penalty of perjury that the representations made in submitting this bid are, to the best of his/her knowledge, true, accurate, and complete.

Respectfully submitted,

Contractor's Business Name Contractor (Print) Title

Business Address: Street Signature Title

City State Zip Contractor's License No. and Classification

Business Phone Number Business Fax Number

Date

Name Title Residence: Street

City State Zip Residence Phone Number

Note: If the bid is made by an individual, it must be signed with the full name of the bidder, whose address must be given: if it is made by a firm, it must be signed in the co - partnership's name by a general partner thereof, who shall also sign his or her own name, and the name and full address of each partner (general and/or limited) must be given; and if it is made by a corporation, it must be signed by a properly authorized officer, the corporate name shall be set forth, and the corporate seal shall be affixed.

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-8

BID PROPOSAL

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
(To be executed by Bidder and submitted with Bid)

State of California

County of Los Angeles

being first duly sworn, deposes and
says that he or she is of
the party making the foregoing bid, that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on the behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, co mmunication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay fee to any corporation, or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid.

NAME OF BIDDER

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER

ADDRESS OF BIDDER

CITY STATE ZIP

ALL SIGNATURES MUST BE WITNESSED BY NOTARY
(attach appropriate jurats)

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-9

BID PROPOSAL

DECLARATION OF ELIGIBILITY TO CONTRACT
[Labor Code Section 1777.1; Public Contract Code Section 6109] The undersigned, a duly authorized representative of the contractor, certifies and declares that:

3. The undersigned contractor is aware of California Public Contract Code Section 6109, which states:
“(a) A public entity, as defined in Section 1100 [of the Public Contract Code], may not permit a contractor or subcontractor who is ineligible to bid or work on, or be awarded, a public works project pursuant to Section 1777.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code to bid on, be awarded, or perform work as a subcontractor on, a public works project. Every public works project shall contain a provision prohibiting a contractor from performing work on a public works project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perf orm work on the public works project pursuant to Section 1771.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code.” “(b) Any contract on a public works project entered into between a contractor and a debarred subcontractor is void as a matter of law. A debarred subcontractor may not receive any public money for performing work as a subcontractor on a public works contract, and any public money that may have been paid to a debarred subcontractor by a contractor on the project shall be returned to the aw arding body. The contractor shall be responsible for the payment of wages to workers of a debarred subcontractor who has been allowed to work on the project.”

4. The undersigned contractor has investigated the eligibility of each and every subcontractor the undersigned contractor intends to use on this public works project and has determined that none of them is ineligible to perform work as a subcontractor on a public works project by virtue of the foregoing provisions of the Public Contract Code, Sections 1771.1 or 1777.7 of the Labor Code, or any other provision of law.

I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed this day of , 20 _, at
(place of execution),
California .

Signature: Name:

Title: Company:

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-10

BID PROPOSAL

PROJECT REFERENCE

In order to fully evaluate your background and experience for the project herein proposed, please submit a list of Public Works and/or similar construction projects completed or in progress within the last three (3) years. Failure to provide this information may constitute grounds for rejection of your bid as non-responsive.

Number of years as a contractor in construction work of this type:

Three projects of this type recently completed:

1. Name (Firm/Agency):

Address:

Contact Person: Telephone No.: ___
Title of Project:

Project Location:

Date of Completion: Contract Amount: $

2. Name (Firm/Agency):

Address:

Contact Person: Telephone No.:

Title of Project:

Project Location:

Date of Completion: Contract Amount: $

3. Name (Firm/Agency):

Address:

Contact Person: Telephone No.:

Title of Project:

Project Location:

Date of Completion: Contract Amount: $

Bidder's Signature

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-11

BID PROPOSAL

CERTIFICATE OF NON-DISCRIMINATION BY CONTRACTORS

As suppliers of goods or services to the City, the firm listed below certifies that it does not discriminate in its employment with regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin; that it is in compliance with all applicable federal, state, and local directives, and executive orders regarding non- discrimination in employment; and that it agrees to pursue positively and aggressively the principle of equal opportunity in employment.

We agree specifically:

1. To establish or observe employment policies which affirmatively promote opportunities for minority persons at all job levels.

3. To take affirmative steps to hire minority employees within the company.

FIRM

TITLE OF PERSON SIGNING

SIGNATURE

DATE

Please include any additional information available regarding equal opportunity employment programs now in effect within your company:

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-12

BID PROPOSAL

CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION – PRIMARY COVERED TRANSACTIONS

(BEFORE COMPLETING CERTIFICATION, READ INSTRUCTIONS ON NEXT PAGE)

1. The prospective primary participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief, that it and its principals:

a. Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal department or agency;

d. Have not within a 5-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public transactions (Federal, State or local) terminated for cause or default.

2. Where the prospective primary participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.

Signature: Name:

Title: Company:

TO BE SUBMITTED WITH PROPOSAL
BP-13

CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION – PRIMARY COVERED TRANSACTIONS
(Continued)

INSTRUCTIONS FOR CERTIFICATION

By signing and submitting this proposal, the prospective primary participant is providing the certification set out below.

1. The inability of a person to provide the certification required below will not necessarily result in denial of participation in this covered transaction. The prospective participant shall submit an explanation of why it cannot provide the certification set out below. The certification or explanation will be considered in connection with the department or agency's determination whether to enter into this transaction.

However, failure of the prospective primary participant to furnish a certification or an explanation shall disqualify such person from participation in this transaction.

2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when the department or agency determined to enter into this transaction. If it is later determined that the prospective primary participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause or default.

3. The prospective primary participant shall provide immediate written notice to the department or agency to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective primary participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.

4. The terms "covered transaction," "debarred," "suspended," "ineligible," "lower tier covered transaction," "participant," "person," "primary covered transaction," "principal," "proposal," and "voluntarily excluded," as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of the rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the department or agency to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations (13 CFR Part 145).

5. The prospective primary participant agrees by submitting this proposal that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency entering into this transaction.

6. The prospective primary participant further agrees by submitting this proposal that it will include the clause titled "Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion-- Lower Tier Covered Transactions," provided by the department or agency entering into this covered transaction, without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitations for lower tier covered transactions.

7. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the ineligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Nonprocurement List.

8. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.

9. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph 6 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency may terminate this transaction for cause or default
CD-1

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (CD)

GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE SERVICES

To be Submitted
within ten (10) calendar days
AFTER
Award of Contract
CD-2

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of , 20 , by and between CITY OF GARDENA in the State of California, hereinafter referred to as “CITY” and , hereinafter referred to as “CONTRACTOR.”

The City and the Contractor mutually agree as follows:

ARTICLE I.

PROJECT: GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER S WIMMING POOL

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

This project is subject to Skilled and Trained Workforce Requirements per Sections 2600 through 2603 of the Public Contract Code.

ARTICLE II.

Said sum shall constitute payment in full for all work performed hereunder, including, without limitation, all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services used or incorporated in the work, supervision, administration, overhead, expenses and any and all other things required, furnished or incurred for completion of the work as specified in the Contract Documents. City shall make payments to Contractor on account of the contract sum at the time, in the manner, and upon the conditions specified in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE III.

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents, which constitute the entire agreement between the City and the Contractor, are enumerated as follows: Proposal Documents, including the Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Bidding Schedule, Bidder's Declaration, Designation of Subcontractors, Bidder's Assurance, and Fair Employment Practices documents; this Agreement; Standard Specifications; Special Provisions; Technical Provisions; Drawings; Plans; and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after the ex ecution of this Agreement. These form the Contract, and all are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein.

CD-3

ARTICLE IV.

EFFECTIVE DATE
This Agreement shall become effective and commence as of the date set forth below on which the last of the parties, whether City or Contractor, executes said Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed and attested by their proper officers thereunto duly authorized.

CITY CONTRACTOR

By: By:

MAYOR (Sign) Sign / Title

Date: Date:

SEAL
Attest: Attest: (Contractor)
By:

CITY CLERK (Sign) By:

Sign / Title
Date: Date:

APPROVED AS TO FORM:

By:

CITY ATTORNEY (Sign)

Date:

CD-4

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE CERTIFICATE

GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE SERVICES

The Contractor shall execute the following form as required by the California Labor Code, Sections 1860 and 1861:

DATED:

CONTRACTOR

By
Signature

Title

ATTEST:

By
Signature

Title
CD-5

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT

AND WAIVER OF SUBROGATION AND CONTRIBUTION

GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE SERVICES

To the fullest extent permitted by law, Indemnitor hereby agrees, at its sole cost and expense, to defend, protect, indemnify, and hold harmless the City of Gardena and its respective elected officials, officers, attorneys, agents, employees, volunteers, s uccessors, and assigns (collectively “Indemnitees”) from and against any and all damages, costs, expenses, liabilities, claims, demands, causes of action, proceedings, expenses, judgments, penalties, liens, and losses of any nature whatsoever, including fees of accountants, attorneys, or other professionals and all costs associated therewith (collectively “Liabilities”), arising or claimed to arise, directly or indirectly, out of, in connection with, resulting from, or related to any act, failure to act, error, or omission of Indemnitor or any of its officers, agents, servants, employees, subcontractors, materialmen, suppliers or their officers, agents, servants or employees, arising or claimed to arise, directly or indirectly, out of, in connection with, resulting from, or related to the above- referenced contract, agreement, license, or permit (the “Agreement”) or the performance or failure to perform any term, provision, covenant, or condition of the Agreement, including this indemnity provision. This indemnity provision is effective regardless of any prior, concurrent, or subsequent active or passive negligence by Indemnitees and shall operate to fully indemnify Indemnitees against any such negligence. This indemnity provision shall survive the termination of the Agreement and is in addition to any other rights or remedies which Indemnitees may have under the law. Payment is not required as a condition precedent to an Indemnitee’s right to recover under this indemnity provision, and an entry of judgment against an Indemnitee shall be conclusive in favor of the Indemnitee’s right to recover under this indemnity provision. Indemnitor shall pay Indemnitees for any attorney fees and costs incurred in enforcing this indemnification provision.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this instrument shall be construed to encompass (a) Indemnitees’ sole negligence or willful misconduct to the limited extent that the underlying Agreement is subject to Civil Code 2782(a), or (b) the contracting public agency’s active negligence to the limited extent that the underlying Agreement is subject to Civil Code 2782(b). This indemnity is effective without reference to the existence or applicability of any insurance coverages which may have been required under the Agreement or any additional insured endorsements which may extend to Indemnitees.

Indemnitor, on behalf of itself and all parties claiming under or through it, hereby waives all rights of subrogation and contribution against the Indemnitees, while acting within the scope of their duties, from all claims, losses and liabilities arising out of or incident to activities or operations performed by or on behalf of the Indemnitor regardless of any prior, concurrent, or subsequent active or passive negligence by the Indemnitees. Accountants, attorneys, or other professionals employed by Indemni tor to defend Indemnitees shall be selected by Indemnitees.

“Indemnitor”

Company/Contractor

Name & Title

Signature & Date
CD-6

CONTRACT DOCUMENT

GARDENA COMMUNITY AQUATIC AND SENIOR CENTER

SWIMMING POOL MAINTENANCE

INSURANCE

CERTIFICATION OF INSURANCE (COI) SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR

Contractor’s insurance shall comply with all items specified by this Contract. Any subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements of this Section and Contractor shall be responsible to obtain evidence of insurance from each subcontractor and provide it to City before the subcontractor commences work. Alternatively, Contractor’s insurance may cover all subcontractors. The insurance requirements are not intended to and shall not in any manner limit or qualify the liabilities and obligations assumed by Contractor under this Contract.

2. INSURANCE COMPANY REQUIREMENTS. All insurance policies used to satisfy the requirements imposed hereunder shall be issued by insurers admitted doing business in the State of California. Insurers shall have a current Best’s rating of not less than A -:VII, unless otherwise approved by City.

3. COVERAGES, LIMITS AND POLICY REQUIREMENTS. Contractor shall maintain the types of coverages indicated below:

4. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE. A policy of comprehensive general liability insurance written on a per occurrence basis in an amount not less than either one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence or two million dollars ($2,000,000) aggregate.

5. COMMERCIAL AUTO LIABILITY INSURANCE. A policy including all coverages provided by and to the extent afforded by Insurance Services Office form CA 0001, ed. 12/93, including Symbol 1 (any auto) with no special limitations affecting City. The minimum auto insurance coverage shall be one million dollars ($1,000,000) combined single limit per accident.

6. WORKER’S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE . A policy which meets all statutory benefit requirements of the Labor Code, or other applicable law, of the State of California. The minimum coverage limits for said insurance shall be no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per claim. The policy shall be issued by an insurance company which is admitted doing business in the State of California and shall contain a clause that the policy may not be canceled without thirty (30) days prior written notice, return receipt requested, is mailed to City.

CD-7

7. POLICY REQUIREMENTS. The policies set forth above shall comply with the following, as evidenced by the policies or endorsements to the policies:

(ii) The insurer shall agree to provide City with thirty (30) days prior written notice, return receipt requested, of any cancellation, non -renewal or material change in coverage.

(iii) For any claims with respect to the Project covered by this Contract, Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects City and its elected and appointed officers, employees, agents and volunteers. Any insurance or self- insurance maintained by City and its elected and appointed officers, employees, agents and volunteers shall be excess of Contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute with it.

(iv) The policy shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought except with respect to the limits of the company’s liability.

8. COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION INSURANCE. Contractor shall provide course of construction insurance covering for “all risks” of loss in the amount of the completed value of the Work. The City shall be named as a loss payee and the insurer shall waive all rights of subrogation against the City. This policy shall be issued by an insurance company which is admitted doing business in the State of California and shall contain a clause that the policy may not be canceled until thirty (30) days written notice, return receipt requested, is mailed to the City. Course of Construction Insurance may be provided for each separate Phase.

9. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. The procuring of required insurance shall not be construed to limit Contractor’s liability hereunder nor to fulfill the indemnification provisions and requirements of this Contract. City shall notify Contractor in writing of changes in the insurance requirements. If Contractor does not deposit copies of acceptable insurance policies or endorsements with City incorporating such changes within sixty (60) days of receipt of such notice, Contractor shall be deemed in default hereunder.

10. DEDUCTIBLES. Any deductible or self-insured retentions must be declared to and approved by City. Contractor shall guarantee that, at the option of the City, either: the insurer shall eliminate or reduce such deductibles or self-insured retentions with respect to City, its officers, employees, agents and volunteers (with additional premium, if any, to be paid by Contractor); or Contractor shall provide satisfactory financial guarantee for payment of losses and related investigations, claim administration and defense expenses in the amount of any deductibles or self-insured retentions.

CD-8

11. VERIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE. Contractor shall furnish City with the required endorsements attached hereto. All documents are to be received and approved by City before Work commences. Not less than fifteen (15) days prior to the expiration date of any policy of insurance required by this Contract, Contractor shall deliver to City a binder or certificate of insurance with respect to each renewal policy, bearing a notation evidencing paym ent of the premium therefore, or accompanied by other proof of payment satisfactory to City. Contractor shall provide full copies of any requested policies to City within three (3) days of any such request by City.

13. EQUIPMENT COVERAGE. Any policy or policies of insurance Contractor or his subcontractors elect to carry as insurance against loss or damage to construction equipment and tools or other personal property shall include a provision waiving the insurer’s right of subrogation against City.

Gardena City CouncilNovember 18, 2025

Gardena City Council
November 18, 2025